00 Codan Radio LMR Technical Notes All (File) 1

User Manual: 00 - Codan Radio LMR Technical Notes - All (File) Technical Notes | LMR & HF Radio | Codan Radio

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 166

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

TECHNICAL NOTES
Technical Notes for
Tuning, Installing,
Maintaining and Servicing
MT-3 and MT-4 Radio Systems

Codan Radio Communications
43 Erie Street
Victoria, British Columbia
Canada V8V 1P8

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139
Email:
Web:

LMRsales@codanradio.com
www.codanradio.com

Toll Free Canada and U.S.A.
Phone:
1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
Table of Contents
System Overview
TN105 Dual Subrack Interconnection
TN110 Channel and Frequency Selection
TN150 Repeater / Tone Remote Controlled Base Station
TN151 Base Station Interface Connections
TN160 Base Station or Link Configuration Settings
TN175 MT-4E Firmware Upgrading
TN180 P25 Digital Ping Feature
TN181 Adjustable Courtesy Tone
TN182 Battery Level Reporting and Remote P25 Test Tone

Receiver Modules
TN247 VR-4E VHF MT-4E Receiver
TN267 UR-4E UHF MT-4E Receiver
TN287 UR-4E UHF 700 / 800 / 900 MHz MT-4E Receiver

Transmitter Modules
TN347 VT-4E VHF MT-4E Transmitter
TN367 UT-4E UHF MT-4E Transmitter
TN387 UT-4E UHF 700 / 800 / 900 MHz MT-4E Transmitter

Power Amplifiers
TN441 AMP-4 VHF and UHF 30 Watt Power Amplifiers
TN490 19” Rack Mount High Power Amplifiers
TN491 Modular 5-Pack Series High Power Amplifiers

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
Table of Contents
Subracks
TN500 SR-39-1 Subrack
TN520 SR-39-3 Multiple Receiver Subrack
TN530 SR-39-4 Multiple Transmitter Subrack

Control Cards
TN600 AC-3E Audio Control Card
TN640 CI-PM-3 Paging Modulator
TN650 CI-RC-4L Repeater Control Card
TN652 CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller
TN655 CI-BC-4E Base Control Card
TN660 UIC-4 Universal Interface Card
TN661 UIC-5 Universal Interface Card
TN670 Stratus™ Controller

Transportable Systems
TN710 ET-3 Transportable Radio System Case
TN720 ET-4 Transportable Radio System Case and HiveNet
TN730 ET-5 Transportable Tactical Radio System
TN735 Vizor™ (ET-6) Transportable Tactical Radio System
TN750 ET-1 Transportable Radio System Case
TN760 Stratus™ Transportable Tactical Radio System
TN761 Stratus™ Fixed Infrastructure Radio System
TN765 Stratus™ Tactical Controller
TN790 Transportable Radio System Accessories
TN791 Stratus™ Power Center
TN792 Stratus™ Rapid Antenna

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
Table of Contents
Other
TN800 A-PNL-AUX96-3 Auxiliary Connector
TN811 SM-3 System Regulator
TN830 AC to DC and DC to DC Power Supplies
TN835 High Current AC to DC Power Supplies
TN836 High Current Digital Series AC to DC Power Supplies
TN840 Extender Cards and Kits
TN855 CI-DSP-223 Telex (Vega) DSP Tone-Remote Adapter
TN856 CI-IP-223 Telex (Vega) IP Network Remote Adapter
TN857 CI-IP-ADAPTER-1 Telex (Vega) IP-224 Ethernet Adapter
TN870 CI-RSWITCH Redundant Switch

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN105 Dual Subrack Interconnection
The SR-39-1 subrack is designed to hold and interconnect the MT-3 and MT-4 series of receiver, transmitter and
control modules on one universal motherboard. This motherboard distributes audio, control and power signals
between the separate modules plugged into the subrack. The two main power signals used by the MT-3 and MT-4
modules are the +13.8 Vdc (power input) and +9.5 Vdc (regulated) power.
The +13.8 Vdc power input (+13.8 Vdc nominal, +10 to +17 Vdc range) is connected to the motherboard by a
terminal strip mounted on the back of the subrack. The +13.8 Vdc signal line is routed through the System Regulator
(SM-3) module and then distributed across the motherboard to the other modules. This allows the user to un-plug
the SM-3 module and turn off all power supplied to the other modules. This feature is not used very often as all
Codan modules are capable of being hot swapped.
The +9.5 Vdc regulated power is generated in the System Regulator module by the internal +9.5 Vdc voltage
regulator built into the SM-3. This +9.5 Vdc regulated voltage is then distributed across the motherboard to the
other modules. The voltage regulator is designed to source enough current to operate all modules in the subrack.
If a Codan radio system is designed so that a second subrack is required, the configuration is dependent on the
modules in the second subrack:
a) If the second subrack requires receiver, transmitter or control cards, a system regulator is required in the second
subrack to source enough current for the +9.5 Vdc regulated voltage to these modules.
b) If the second subrack contains only Codan 30 Watt power amplifier modules (see Figure 1), the +9.5 Vdc
regulated voltage current draw for these modules is very low, and the SM-3 in the first subrack can source enough
current for the power amplifiers in the second subrack. In this case, a second SM-3 module is not required, and the
+9.5 Vdc regulated voltage is jumpered from the first subrack with the SM-3 to the second subrack with no SM-3
module.
The +9.5 Vdc regulated voltage is jumpered from one subrack to the other, using the +9.5 Vdc input / output
connector on the motherboard. This connector is the same type as the +13.8 Vdc power input connector, but is
used to connect +9.5 Vdc between a subrack with an SM-3 and a subrack with no SM-3.
The +13.8 Vdc power input is also connected to both subracks, but the second subrack has no SM-3 module
installed (the +13.8 Vdc is typically routed through the SM-3). Jumper JU1 is required to be installed in the second
subrack to allow +13.8 Vdc power input to be connected directly to the 30 Watt power amplifiers. Jumper JU1 is
typically a 16 AWG wire soldered across the jumper points (see Figure 2 for jumper wires and JU1 placement). On
older motherboards (Serial # 123125 and earlier) the jumper is in the same location, but is labelled as JU40.
If a radio system is ordered from the factory with this configuration, the jumper wires are included in the shipment
and jumper JU1 is installed at the factory.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN105 Rev 5-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN105 Dual Subrack Interconnection

FIRST SUBRACK WITH
TRANSMITTERS, RECEIVERS,
SYSTEM REGULATOR & CONTROL CARD

A D

REF
IN

A D

SYSTEM REGULATOR

FREQUENCY (MHz)

MICMODE

A D

REF
IN

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

FREQUENCY (MHz)

FUNCTION

12
11

SWITCH B
15

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

REPEATER
CONTROL
SWITCH A

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF

MICMODE

SQ. DISABLE

NORM
OFF

1
2

5
7

TX A
REF
IN

USB

REF
IN

USB

VOL

RX A
CNTL
BUS

CNTL
BUS

USB

TX B

USB

RF I N
MIC

MIC

RF OUT

CNTL
BUS

OFF

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

RF I N

RF OUT

RX B

POWER
ON

METER

CNTL
BUS

SPKR

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE
MADE IN CANADA

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

SECOND SUBRACK WITH
30 WATT POWER AMPLIFIER
MODULES ONLY

NO CONTROL CARD
REQUIRED
POWER AMPLIFIER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

NO SYSTEM REGULATOR
REQUIRED

POWER AMPLIFIER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

RF OUTPUT

PWR CTRL

RF OUTPUT

PWR CTRL

G/F

VSWR

VSWR
RF INPUT

RF INPUT

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

Figure 1 - Front View of Dual Subracks; Second Subrack has only Power Amplifiers
+9.5 Vdc
REGULATED
POWER OUTPUT

POWER INPUT
+10 to +17 Vdc
+13.8 Vdc NOMINAL

POWER
SUPPLY
INPUT

POWER INPUT
+10 to +17 Vdc
+13.8 Vdc NOMINAL

JU1 INSTALLED
WITH 16 AWG WIRE

FIRST SUBRACK WITH
TRANSMITTERS, RECEIVERS,
SYSTEM REGULATOR & CONTROL CARD

+9.5 Vdc
POWER INPUT

SECOND SUBRACK WITH
30 WATT POWER AMPLIFIER
MODULES ONLY

Figure 2 - Rear View of Dual Subracks; Jumper wires between first and second subrack

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN105 Rev 5-1-0

Mar 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN110 Channel and Frequency Selection
MT-4E Channel and Bank Selection
MT-4E radio modules are capable of 16 channel operation in 2 banks (32 channels total).
The 16 channels are controlled via four CSEL signal lines connected to each receiver and transmitter module. The
CSEL signal lines are set as either a 0 (0 Vdc) or a 1 (+9.5 Vdc). Table 1 shows the channel selected for the CSEL
input settings.

Table 1: Channel Selection Settings
Channel

Decimal

CSEL3

CSEL2

CSEL1

CSEL0

The Receiver and Transmitter Bank A/B select lines are set as either a B (0 Vdc) or an A (+9.5 Vdc). The logic for
the Bank A/B select lines is different from the CSEL signal lines. If the Bank A/B select line is pulled high (+9.5 Vdc),
or left floating, Bank A is selected. If the Bank A/B select line is pulled low (0 Vdc), Bank B is selected.
On older motherboards (Serial # 123125 and earlier), the Receiver Bank A/B select line uses the same line as the
MT-3 Receiver ISO COR K and the Transmitter Bank A/B select line uses the same line as the MT-3 Transmitter
Standby. No jumpers are available for the Bank select.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN110

Rev 4-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN110 Channel and Frequency Selection
There are 3 different ways to change the channel and bank of a transmitter / receiver module:
1

The user can set jumpers mounted on the motherboard for each Channel Select signal line (set of four for
each Tx / Rx module) and Bank A/B select line. These jumpers can be used to permanently set a subrack
slot at a specific channel and bank.
• Jumpers can be set for 0 (0 Vdc) “down” or 1 (+9.5 Vdc) “up”.
• Pull-up resistor jumpers to +9.5 Vdc must be installed.

CSEL signal lines and Bank A/B select lines can be controlled externally by a tone remote adapter, a
CI-RC-4M-G2 multiple link controller, or other third party devices.

Sixteen-position rotary select switches mounted on the CI-BC-4E base controller can control the CSEL lines
and toggle switches can control the Bank A/B select line. Optionally the CI-RC-4L repeater controller or AC-3E
control card can have a rotary switch added for control of the CSEL signal lines. The control lines can also be
controlled by selecting the channel through a UIC control card.

The Pull-up resistor jumpers to +9.5 Vdc must be removed and all channel select and bank select jumpers must be
installed in the 1 or “up” position for both external control and rotary switch control of channel selection.

MT-4 Modules Frequency Selection
The MT-4 modules operating frequency is selected in standard channel increments through the Radio Service
Software (RSS). Frequencies can be directly entered or selected through the use of a spin button that cycles
through valid frequencies.

Transmitter A Channel Select Switching Control Option
The motherboard can be jumper configured to allow switching control of the TXA CSEL lines between a control card
and an external connection such as a tone remote.
Jumpers JU86 to JU93 are installed by default to allow either the A-PNL-AUX96-3 auxiliary connector, or AC-3E /
CI-BC-4E / UIC-4 control cards to have control of the Transmitter A channel select lines. This will cause contention
if both a control card and auxiliary connection attempt to change the channel select lines.
Switching control of the Channel Select lines can be selected by use of two General Purpose Inputs. GPIO22 and
GPIO23 allow for the use of a connection to Ground to enable or disable local control.
GPIO22 - Ground disables local (AC-3E / CI-BC-4E / UIC-4) control & enables auxiliary control.
GPIO23 - Ground enables local (AC-3E / CI-BC-4E / UIC-4) control & disables auxiliary control.
To allow switching control of the channel select lines remotely, remove jumpers JU86 to JU93, and install jumpers
JU94 to JU101, then install jumper JU102 or JU103 to determine if an active low will enable or disable the local
control of the channel select control.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN110

Rev 4-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN110 Channel and Frequency Selection

C21

A21

B21

JU101

JU93
JU92

JU100

JU91
JU90

JU99

JU89
JU88

JU98

JU87
JU86

C23

AC-3E
CI-BC-4E
UIC-4
CONNECTOR
(J1)

Transmitter A Channel Select Switching Control Option Diagram

TXA CSEL2
TXA CSEL3
REVERSE
LOGIC

JU97

TN110

Rev 4-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

JU103
GPIO22
(GND DISABLES
LOCAL CONTROL)

JU102
GPIO23
(GND ENABLES
LOCAL CONTROL)

C21

B21

A-PNL-AUX96-3
AUXILIARY
CONNECTOR
(P1)

A21

C23

PWR

JU96

JU94

JU95

TXA CSEL0
TXA CSEL1

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN110 Channel and Frequency Selection
This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN110

Rev 4-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN150 Repeater / Tone Remote Controlled Base Station
A Codan radio system can be configured for a wide variety of radio system solutions. The large number of varied
solutions and the customizability of the radio system makes for a wide variety of audio, serial data and COR-PTT
routing configurations.
A repeater / analog controlled base station uses the LVDS serial data cable to allow full mixed mode (analog and
P25 digital) repeating, while the analog audio is sent to and from the tone remote adapter via the AC-3E or CI-BC4E control cards. This system can be configured as a “repeater only” by removing the control card or tone remote
adapter. It can also be configured as a “tone remote controlled base only” by removing the LVDS serial data cable.
If used as an analog repeater only, jumpers can be set in the control card to repeat audio and the LVDS serial data
cable can be disconnected.
Connections to the tone remote adapter are typically made from the receiver and transmitter, through the control
card to the adapter. Physical connections can be made on the A-PNL-AUX96-3 auxilairy connector, or the DB-25
connector (J10), both located on the back of the subrack.
Optionally, the receiver and transmitter can be connected directly to the tone remote adapter and bypass the control
card. The control card should be removed from the subrack or unwanted loading could occur. The A-PNL-AUX96-3
auxiliary connector supports connection directly to the receiver and transmitter, and the DB-25 (J10) can be jumper
selected to change the pins from Auxiliary Audio to Receiver / Transmitter Audio.
The tone remote adapter may also be replaced by an IP adapter, such as a Telex IP-223 or IP-224

DB25 Connector (J10)
Connector J10 is a female DB25 connector which can be used for basic base connections. When connected to a
Telex DSP-223 or IP-223 / IP-224, a standard straight-through male-to-male DB25 cable can be used with some
motherboard jumper changes. The IP-224 requires a female DB25 to male DB37 adapter. The IP-223 / IP-224
also requires that 2 pins on the DB25 (PTT COM - pin2 and MON COM - pin 16) are wired to ground for proper
operation. The DB25 can also be jumpered for Balanced Audio direct to / from the receiver / transmitter or Auxiliary
Audio (recommended) through the controller.
WARNING: JU108 must be configured correctly for DSP-223 or IP-223 / IP-224 or damage can occur.
JU104
JU105
JU106

A = RX A Bal O/P2 or B = AUX 1 AUD O/P2
A = TX A Bal I/P2 or B = AUX 1 AUD I/P2
A = TX A Bal I/P1 or B = AUX 1 AUD I/P1

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN150 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

JU107
JU108
JU109

A = RX A Bal O/P1 or B = AUX AUD O/P1
A = DSP-223 / +13.8 V or B = IP-223 & IP-224/ RX A COR
TX A SEC / CLR I/P (installed to enable TX A SEC / CLR I/P)

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

TO / FROM
TONE REMOTE
CONSOLE

RADIO
TX

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004
LINE
TX

RADIO
RX

2 or 4 WIRE
LINE
INPUT / OUTPUT

LINE
RX

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

-8.0 dBm
(307 mVrms)

0 dBm
(775 mVrms)

COR

ANALOG LVDS
LEVEL ADJUST

RECEIVER

ANALOG LVDS
LEVEL ADJUST

PTT

TRANSMITTER

ALL INTERNAL CONNECTIONS
AVAILABLE ON A-PNL-AUX96-3
(TYPICALLY USED FOR TEST PURPOSES)
OPTIONALLY AVAILABLE ON DB-25
CONNECTOR (VIA JUMPER SELECT)

RX BALANCED
AUDIO OUTPUT

RX COR OUTPUT

AUXILIARY
BALANCED
OUTPUT

Jumper Installed
to Disable
Audio Path
(Must be used
with RJ45 Cable
Installed)

-8.0 dBm
(307 mVrms)

0 dBm
(775 mVrms)

TX PTT INPUT

TX BALANCED
AUDIO INPUT

OPTICAL
ISOLATOR

AUXILIARY
BALANCED
AUDIO INPUT

AUXILIARY
PTT (K) INPUT

AC-3E or CI-BC-4E

ALL AUXILIARY CONNECTIONS
AVAILABLE ON A-PNL-AUX96-3
and DB-25 CONNECTOR

PTT

TELEX (VEGA) DSP-223
TONE REMOTE ADAPTER

1 KHz Tone @
60% of Max. Modulation
(1.5 KHz Narrowband
3.0 KHz Wideband)

RJ45 Cable
LVDS Serial Data +
Analog and Digital
COR-PTT Routing
(Required for P25
Digital Repeater)

1 KHz Tone @
60% of Max. Modulation
(1.5 KHz Narrowband
3.0 KHz Wideband)

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems

TN150 Repeater / Tone Remote Controlled Base Station

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN150 Rev 1-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN151 Base Station Interface Connections
Base Stations can be interfaced to a console, or console network through a variety of technologies that have
changed considerably over the years.
Analog Tone Remote Interface
An Analog Tone Remote Interface provides a means of remotely controlling base stations by any voice grade
transmission medium such as a microwave link, a leased telephone line, or a twisted-pair 600-ohm line. An
industry-standard sequential tone keying format is generated by the console and is sent over the transmission
medium to a tone remote adapter that is capable of decoding the PTT tone sequence and the voice-plus-tone
signals. The tone portion of the voice-plus-tone signal is removed from the transmitted voice by the adapter. A tone
remote base station interface is shown in Figure 1.

TELEX

TELEX DSP-223 TONE

DSP-223

FUNCTION

GR
OU
LIN ND
E
RA TX
DIO CT TX
CS
LIN S
E
LIN RX
E
RA TX
DIO +
RA TX
DIO +
RX
LIN
E
TX
LIN
E
RX
RA
DIO
TX
RA
DIO
RX
CT
CS
S

HANDSET
PROGRAMMING PORT

POWER

PTT

REMOTE ADAPTER

MONITOR

PTT IC

ANALOG 2 OR 4 WIRE AUDIO AND TONES

COMMON AIR

ANALOG AUDIO INTERFACE

(LEASED TELEPHONE LINES)
ANALOG TONE REMOTE

FREQUENCY (MHz)

CONSOLE

A D

REF
IN

A
5

MICMODE

TX A

Secure

5
7

REF
IN

USB

BNK

TX A

INTERFACE

ANTENNA A

NORM
OFF

1
2

10
SQ. DISABLE

A
5

FUNCTION

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

BNK

SYSTEM REGULATOR

FREQUENCY (MHz)

RX A
13

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

P25 BASE
CONTROL

VOL

RX A

+
METER
-

TX B

CNTL
BUS

TX A
USB

Clear

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

RF I N

Local

MIC

Enable

RF OUT
CNTL
BUS

Disable

Zeroize
Key

SPKR

P25 DIGITAL OR

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE
MADE IN CANADA

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

ANALOG SUBSCRIBER

CODAN RADIO SYSTEM WITH AUDIO CARD
OR BASE CONTROL CARD

Figure 1: Analog Tone Remote Interface

IP Network Remote Interface
An IP Network Remote Interface provides a means of remotely controlling base stations by any available Wide
Area Network (WAN) or Local Area Network (LAN) IP connection. This creates a Radio over IP (RoIP) network to
allow any Telex IP based console to communicate with the Telex IP Network adapter. Audio and control information
is encoded and decoded in a proprietary format over the network and converted back to analog audio and control
information (PTT) at the interface between the base station and adapter. The Telex IP network solution provides
voice and control over IP, but it is not end-to-end digital, or open standard. An IP network remote base station
interface is shown in Figure 2.

IP-223
X

GND
TX
TX+
-

TELEX IP-223 OR IP-224

HANDSET

TX
+
TX
TX

TELEX
R

LAN / WAN

LINE

TX
LNK

RADIO 1

RADIO 2

IP REMOTE ADAPTER
COMMON AIR

ANALOG AUDIO INTERFACE
RX A

TELEX IP BASED

TELEX PROPRIETARY DIGITAL IP INTERFACE

CONSOLE

FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

BNK

MICMODE

TX A

FREQUENCY (MHz)

A D

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

P25 BASE
CONTROL

SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF

A
5

TX A

REF
IN

USB

BNK

Secure

TX B

Local
Enable

ANTENNA A

INTERFACE

5
7

VOL

RX A

+
METER
-

CNTL
BUS

TX A
USB

Clear

RF I N
MIC

RF OUT
CNTL
BUS

Zeroize
Key

SYSTEM REGULATOR
FUNCTION

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

Disable

SPKR

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE
MADE IN CANADA

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

CODAN RADIO SYSTEM WITH AUDIO CARD

P25 DIGITAL OR
ANALOG SUBSCRIBER

OR BASE CONTROL CARD

Figure 2: IP Network Remote Interface

In an analog tone remote and IP network remote, all P25 Digital communications are vocoded and de-vocoded at
the base station. This means that the interface does not support end-to-end encryption, P25 Digital ID’s or packet
data, to or from the console and base station.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN151 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN151 Base Station Interface Connections
Proprietary IP Network Interface
A Proprietary IP Network Interface provides a means of remotely controlling one manufacturer’s base stations
by any available WAN or LAN IP connection. This creates a single vendor end-to-end digital RoIP network that
restricts interoperability, system flexibility and competition. A proprietary IP network remote base station interface
is shown in Figure 3.

COMMON AIR
INTERFACE

LAN / WAN
P25 DIGITAL OR
MOTOROLA CENTRACOM

MOTOROLA PROPRIETARY DIGITAL IP INTERFACE

ANALOG SUBSCRIBER

MOTOROLA QUANTAR

GOLD ELITE CONSOLE

Figure 3: Proprietary IP Network Interface

P25 Open Standard Digital Fixed Station Interface (DFSI)
A P25 Open Standard Digital Fixed Station Interface (DFSI) provides a means of remotely controlling base stations
by any available WAN or LAN IP connection. This creates a multi-vendor platform end-to-end digital RoIP network
that supports full interoperability, system flexibility and competitive pricing between vendors. A DFSI interface fully
supports end-to-end encryption, P25 Digital ID’s and packet data, to or from the console and base station. A DFSI
network remote base station interface is shown in Figure 4.

TRANSMITTER

UIC

RECEIVER

FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

A D

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MICMODE

LAN / WAN

FREQUENCY (MHz)

SYSTEM REGULATOR
FUNCTION

ETHERNET

ANTENNA A

10
SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF

5
7

RX A

TX A

REF
IN

USB
RX A

COMMON AIR

VOL

METER

INTERFACE

ZEROIZE
KEY

CNTL
BUS

TX A
USB

TX B

RF I N
USB

MIC

RF OUT
CNTL
BUS

RX B

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT
SPKR

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE

P25 DFSI CONSOLE

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

CODAN RADIO SYSTEM WITH UIC

P25 DIGITAL FIXED STATION INTERFACE

P25 DIGITAL OR
ANALOG SUBSCRIBER

Figure 4: P25 Open Standard Digital Fixed Station Interface (DFSI)

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN151 Rev 1-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN160 Base Station or Link Configuration Settings
When configuring a Codan radio system for base station operation or for a linked configuration, certain settings,
such as jumpers, may need to be installed to allow the base station or link to operate properly.
The receiver and transmitter modules are used with specific control cards to facilitate the external connections of a
base station, or to allow the complex connectivity of a linked system. The MT-3 modules are connected to an AC-3E
Audio Control Card and the MT-4 modules are connected to a CI-BC-4E Base Controller for base station operation,
or a CI-RC-4L Repeater Controller or CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller for a linked system. The A-PNLAUX96-3 auxiliary connector is recommended for facilitating all external connections in a base configuration.

Antenna Relay Activation
The System Regulator module may have up to two optional antenna relays installed that can be used for a base
station or simplex / half-duplex link configuration. The antenna relays are labeled as Relay A and Relay B (if only
one relay is installed, it is Relay A). The motherboard on the subrack contains a set of jumpers that are used to
activate the optional antenna relays in the System Regulator module. The relays are typically set with the PTT IN
and PTT OUT signal lines activating the relays.
Jumpers function as follows:
JU36
JU39
JU42
JU45

Tx A PTT OUT activates Relay A
Tx A PTT OUT activates Relay B
Tx B PTT OUT activates Relay A
Tx B PTT OUT activates Relay B

JU37
JU40
JU43
JU46

Tx A PTT IN activates Relay A
Tx A PTT IN activates Relay B
Tx B PTT IN activates Relay A
Tx B PTT IN activates Relay B

On older motherboards (Serial # 123125 and earlier) the jumpers were as follows:
JU16
JU14
JU15
JU13

Tx A PTT OUT activates Relay A
Tx A PTT OUT activates Relay B
Tx B PTT OUT activates Relay A
Tx B PTT OUT activates Relay B

JU12
JU10
JU11
JU9

Tx A PTT IN activates Relay A
Tx A PTT IN activates Relay B
Tx B PTT IN activates Relay A
Tx B PTT IN activates Relay B

Simplex Operation
The motherboard on the subrack contains a set of jumpers that are enabled when the radio system is operated in
simplex mode (simplex base station or simplex links). The jumper connects the Transmitter PTT OUT signal line to
the RX MUTE. This jumper will cause the receiver to mute when the transmitter is keyed.
JU38
JU44

Tx A PTT OUT mutes Rx A
Tx B PTT OUT mutes Rx A

JU41
JU47

Tx A PTT OUT mutes Rx B
Tx B PTT OUT mutes Rx B

The new System Regulators also have the same simplex mode jumpers for backwards compatibility with older
motherboards that did not have these jumpers. The jumpers were located on the old System Monitor as follows:
JU12

Tx A PTT OUT mutes Rx A

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN160 Rev 4-1-0

JU13

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

Tx B PTT OUT mutes Rx B

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN160 Base Station or Link Configuration Settings
CI-RC-4M-G2 Simplex Operation
The CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller can also be set for simplex link operation in the software under the
System Settings tab, but requires the MUTE line to be connected from the subrack to the controller.

Simplex Operation Improvement
On some simplex base or link systems, the Rx MUTE line may be released too quickly after the Tx PTT is deactivated.
The RF signal has not had enough time to decay before the receiver is un-muted and this can produce an audible
noise burst or blip at the end of each transmission.
MT-3 Systems require that two resistors within the receivers be replaced with 47K ohm resistors (1150-4B1002FP).
R95 and R96 require replacement in FM receivers. AM receivers require that R35 and R83 are replaced.
MT-4E Systems have a software selectable Simplex Unmute Delay jumper setting that can be enabled in the RSS
software Service section.
MT-4D Systems require that JU33 is installed in the Y position in the receivers.
MT-4R Systems require a 4.7 uF capacitor (1055-5B475K16) to be added to the PTT OUT signal line. This
modification was part of ECO 758. Any transmitters that were sold before, and have not been returned to the factory
since March 2003, will require this modification for simplex operation.

MT-4R or MT-4D Base Station with Telex (Vega) DSP-223 Control
If an MT-4R or MT-4D base station is operated by a console other than a Telex product, through a Telex DSP-223
tone remote adapter, there is a possibility the transmitter may not change channels properly (only changing channels
every second time the PTT is activated at the console).
If the MT-4R or MT-4D system is being controlled by a CI-BC-4E Base Controller, JU125 is required to be installed
in the controller.
If the MT-4R or MT-4D system is being controlled by an AC-3E Audio Control Card (not recommended), a 22 uF
capacitor (1054-6G226M20) is required to be added by soldering the positive lead to J23 and the negative lead to
ground.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN160 Rev 4-1-0

Mar 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN175 MT-4E Firmware Upgrading
Codan Radio Communications allows customers to upgrade the firmware of their MT-4E Receivers and Transmitters
via the Firmware Flashing Software and Firmware Upgrade files. The Firmware Flashing Software and Firmware
upgrade files are all available at the Codan website www.codanradio.com under Support - Software & Firmware.
It is not necessary to upgrade the firmware if the equipment is installed and is operating satisfactory. A firmware
upgrade is typically only needed to fix minor software bugs or to upgrade the functionality of the equipment.
Firmware versions earlier than 1.6.0 must be returned to the factory for upgrading. Firmware version 1.6.0 and
1.7.0 may need to be returned to the factory for minor hardware upgrades. Contact the Codan service department
for more information.

Instructions
Please read all of these instructions before beginning the Firmware Flashing process.
Download the Firmware Flashing Software and appropriate Firmware upgrading files to a PC running a Windows
XP (or higher) operating system before beginning the upgrading procedure.

Choosing the Appropriate Firmware Upgrading Files
MT-4E Receivers and Transmitters can be purchased as an analog radio, or they can be purchased with the P25
Digital radio firmware package. If the radio is Analog only, download the Analog firmware upgrade, if it is P25 Digital
(and Analog) capable, download the Digital firmware upgrade. To determine if the MT-4E Receiver or Transmitter
is Analog only or P25 Digital, read the firmware version of the module using the Firmware Flashing Software or the
Radio Service Software as shown in Figure 1. If the last digit of the firmware version is an “a” or “0”, the firmware is
Analog only, if the last digit is a “d” or “1”, the firmware is P25 Digital and Analog.
NOTE: The Firmware Flashing Software will not allow you to program an MT-4E Receiver or Transmitter with the
wrong firmware upgrade

Figure 1: Version Number Examples

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN175 Rev 4-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN175 MT-4E Firmware Upgrading
Download the latest firmware version (Analog or Digital) from the website for both the receiver and transmitter. If
the current firmware version of the MT-4E Receiver or Transmitter is 1.6.0 or 1.7.0, an additional Bootloader and
Version 2.0.0 firmware (Analog or Digital) will also need to be downloaded.

Using the Firmware Flashing Software
Start the Firmware Flashing Software application and turn on the MT-4E Receiver or Transmitter. Using a USB type
A to 5 pin mini-type B cable (the same USB cable used to program the modules), connect the USB port of the PC
to the USB port on the front panel of the MT-4E Receiver or Transmitter module as shown in Figure 2.

REF
IN

A D

SYSTEM REGULATOR
FUNCTION

MICMODE

SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF

1
2
3

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

FREQUENCY (MHz)

SWITCH B
15

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

REPEATER
CONTROL
SWITCH A

5
7

TX A
REF
IN

USB

VOL

RX A
CNTL
BUS

USB CABLE

USB

TX B

RF I N
MIC

RF OUT
CNTL
BUS

RX B

POWER
ON

METER
OFF

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT
SPKR

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE
MADE IN CANADA

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

Figure 2: PC to Radio USB Connection

An information window will appear stating that the existing firmware in the radio is out of date and needs to be
upgraded. Click OK to close this window.
If the current firmware version of the MT-4E Receiver or Transmitter is 1.6.0 or 1.7.0 a Bootloader dialog box will
appear. See the section on upgrading Firmware version 1.6.0 and 1.7.0. If the current firmware version is 2.1.0 or
higher, the Firmware Flashing Software can upgrade the firmware immediately to the next firmware version without
the Bootloader.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN175 Rev 4-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN175 MT-4E Firmware Upgrading
Flashing the Firmware
To apply the firmware upgrade (or Bootloader), click on File - Open and navigate to the directory where the firmware
upgrades are stored on your PC. Load the appropriate update file (Transmitter / Receiver; Analog only / Digital and
Analog; Bootloader / Firmware Version) as shown in Figure 3.

Figure 3: Firmware Flashing Software Example.

Click on the Program button to start the firmware update process. A dialog box will appear asking confirmation to
proceed with the firmware update. A dialog box will also appear cautioning against interrupting the flashing process
in any way while the firmware is being updated. This is very important as any interruptions could cause the firmware
in the radio to be corrupted. Click on OK to proceed with the firmware update.
At the conclusion of the update the radio may need to be manually reset by cycling power to the module.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN175 Rev 4-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN175 MT-4E Firmware Upgrading
Upgrading Firmware version 1.6.0 and 1.7.0
If the current firmware version of the MT-4E Receiver or Transmitter is 1.6.0 or 1.7.0, a dialog box will appear as
shown in Figure 4, warning that the firmware is out of date and will require the Bootloader.

Figure 4: Version 1.6.0 and 1.7.0 Warning Dialog Box

Once the Bootloader is applied, the module’s firmware will appear as version 0.0.0. Firmware Version 2.0.0 is
required to be installed next and a dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 5.

Figure 5: Bootloader Warning Dialog Box

When installing Version 2.0.0, another dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 6, warning that the Bootloader
must have been applied before proceeding.

Figure 6: Version 2.0.0 Warning Dialog Box

Bringing the MT-4E Receiver or Transmitter module up to Firmware Version 2.0.0 is a two-step process, which is
required in order to apply any further firmware upgrades. Once this two-step process is completed, it will not be
required again. Firmware Version 2.0.0 is a “blank” firmware version and must be upgraded to the latest firmware
in order for the module to operate.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN175 Rev 4-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN180 P25 Digital Ping Feature
A conventional radio system requires the users to set the subscriber radio on the frequency pair of the nearest
repeater by manually turning the channel selector knob. This requires more training and attention on the part of
the radio user.
Subscriber radios can be programmed to scan the repeater transmit frequencies to lock onto the repeater when it
is transmitting. Standard scanning results in the subscriber selecting and using the first channel in the scan list it
finds an active (transmitted) signal. Since the repeater talk-out range is generally greater than the subscriber talkin range, standard scanning does not always result in the optimal channel (typically the closest repeater) for the
subscriber to operate on.
In Vote Scan operation, each channel is qualified by measuring the received signal strength of each repeater at
the subscriber radio. The subscriber then votes from the repeater sites, selecting either the best signal or the first
signal that exceeds a pre-programmed received level threshold.
In order to keep the subscriber locked onto the best (typically closest) repeater site when the subscriber is keyed,
the repeaters need to have traffic on the transmitter regularly. Since the radio users may not have consistent radio
traffic, a Codan repeater can be programmed to ping after an inactive time interval allowing the vote-scanning
subscriber radios to lock onto the best repeater. The ping uses the P25 standard “silent” message, so that users
will not hear the radio traffic, but it will activate the vote-scan capability in the subscriber.
The optional digital ping software timer is configured to key the transmitter after a specified time (interval) with no
activity, with a message of programmable duration (length) as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1: Optional P25 Digital Ping Feature

Ping Interval range: 10 sec to 120 secs.
Ping Length: 1 sec to 15 secs (rounded to nearest LDU length – 180 mS)
The maximum Ping Length is less than 50% Ping Interval. e.g. Ping length < 5s if Ping interval set to 10s.
Setting the Ping Interval to a small value and the Ping Length to a large value will cause excessive network traffic.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN180 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN180 P25 Digital Ping Feature
This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN180 Rev 1-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN181 Adjustable Courtesy Tone
An Adjustable Courtesy Tone option allows customization of the courtesy tone transmitted at the end of an analog
or P25 Digital transmission. The Adjustable Courtesy Tone is available in addition to the Fixed Courtesy Tone
implementation. The Radio Service Software (RSS) allows selection of either the fixed or Adjustable Courtesy
Tone. If the Adjustable Courtesy Tone feature is disabed, the hang timer / courtesy tone will revert to it’s previous
(older firmware) method of programming and operation. This selection is made under Service->Courtesy Tone.
The Adjustable Courtesy Tone feature requires transmitter firmware version 2.10.9 (or higher) and RSS version
1.7.6 (or higher).

Figure 1: Adjustable Courtesy Tone

With the Adjustable Courtesy Tone, users may set different courtesy tone settings for the following scenarios:
• transmission is shorter than a user programmable length
• transmission is longer than a user programmable length
• 13.8 Volt line (Supply Voltage) is below (or above) user programmable threshold #1.
• 13.8 Volt line (Supply Voltage) is below (or above) user programmable threshold #2.
• Courtesy Tone when input pin B14 or Z14 on the Transmitter module is asserted.
This is the MT-3 PTT NTO pin. Accessible as J1-3 (TX A PTT) for TXA and J1-11 (TX B PTT) for TXB on the
back panel Auxiliary connector (P1). Also, JU21 must be installed in the A position for TXA and JU20 must be
installed in the A position for TXB.
• Loss of Network condition

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN181 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 17

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN181 Adjustable Courtesy Tone
Setting the Adjustable Courtesy Tone
The priority level of each scenario can be independantly selected, or any scenarios can be individually disabled.
The priority arrangement must be the same for both analog and P25 digital mode.
The courtesy tone operation consists of 2 tones. Both tones can be programmed the same or differently or as
silent.
To have a silent tone in analog mode, simply set the volume of the tone to “0” or set the tone to 0 Hz. To have a
silent tone in P25 digital mode, set the tone frequency to 0 Hz.
The courtesy tone generated in analog mode is done after the pre-emphasis stage of the signal processing
chain of the transmitter. Therefore it will always come out as flat audio response. Separate volumes controls are
provided for the first and second tones in cases where the listening receiver is using de-emphasis.
In P25 mode, the following hang time behaviors are offered:
• Silent Voice Frame Only
• Silent Voice Frame + Tone
• Simple Terminator Data Unit only (typically used for P25 encrypted calls)
• Simple Terminator Data Unit + Tone (typically used for P25 encrypted calls)
Sample tone setup for the Adjustable Courtesy Tone:
- Set the “Adjustable Courtesy Tone” option to ‘Enable’.
- Set the “Battery Reading Level 1 Trigger” to the low voltage trigger point. Such as 10 Vdc
- Set the “Battery Reading Level 2 Trigger” to the High voltage trigger point. Such as 17 Vdc
- In the Analog table set the two tones and level for the Battery Level 1 and 2.
- Set the Priority to 1 and all other priorities to 0 if the other settings are not used.
The transmitter will now send a two tone at the end of a transmission if the voltage goes below or above the
indicated voltage trigger point.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN181 Rev 1-0-0

Mar 17

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN182 Battery Level Reporting and Remote P25 Test Tone
Battery Level Reporting is a method of activating a repeater remotely to have it transmit a signal that reports the
battery voltage level over RF. The Remote P25 Test Tone is a remotely activated Standard 1011 Hz P25 test tone
transmitted out of a repeater that allows a mobile coverage test to be done with a receiver performing a P25 Bit
Error Rate test.
Both the Battery Level Reporting and Remote P25 Test Tone are only available in a repeater configuration with
a receiver connected to a transmitter through the front panel RJ45 Control bus. It can be a direct connection, or
through a CI-RC-4L repeater controller or a CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller. The Battery Level Reporting
and Remote P25 Test Tone are activated by a DTMF signal sent over RF to the repeater receiver.
The Battery Level Reporting and Remote P25 Test Tone features requires transmitter firmware version 2.10.9 (or
higher), receiver firmware version 2.9.8 (or higher) and RSS version 1.7.6 (or higher).
Battery Level Reporting
When the receiver receives a DTMF code of ##123 (or any three-digit programmed ID code), it will initiate the
transmitter with the corresponding three digit value (ID code of 123) to key up and transmit the battery level.
• The battery level is measured internally by the transmitter every two seconds.
• The battery reporting transmission can be stopped by another PTT from a subscriber radio.
• A DC offset adjustment (of the 13.8V line reading) is required for each transmitter. The procedure of this adjustment
is described in Battery Level Reporting DC Offset Adjustment Procedures.
Analog Mode
In analog mode, an audio tone that corresponds to the battery level of the repeater system is transmitted. For
example, a 1380 Hz tone transmitted over the air corresponds to a battery level of 13.80 Vdc.
• The duration of the reporting transmission is user programmable but has to be at least ten seconds.
• The deviation of the analog tone can be adjusted in the software as the tone volume.
P25 Digital Mode
In P25 digital mode a DTMF tone sequence that corresponds to the battery level of the repeater system is
transmitted. The battery level reporting is a DTMF tone sequence in the following format (in P25):
• Example - B125A123
• B marks the beginning of the battery level.
• The three 0 to 9 digits make up the battery level reporting.
• B125 means battery level of 12.5 Vdc
• A marks the beginning of the ID code of the transmitter reporting the battery level.
• The three 0 to 9 plus A, B, C, D digits is the ID code of the transmitter that reported the battery level.
• The number of times the battery report string transmits is user programmable but has to be at least two times.
• The duration of the silent P25 frame gap between each DTMF sequence is user programmable.
• The P25 Digital DTMF tone sequence volume can be adjusted in the tone volume.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN182 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 17

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 8

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN182 Battery Level Reporting and Remote P25 Test Tone

Figure 1: Transmitter Battery Level Reporting

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 8

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN182 Rev 1-0-0

Mar 17

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN182 Battery Level Reporting and Remote P25 Test Tone
Remote Keying of 1011 Hz P25 Test Tone
This feature is only applicable to P25 digital mode. When the receiver receives a DTMF code of **123 (or any
three-digit programmed ID code), it will initiate the transmitter with the corresponding three digit value (ID code of
123) to key up and transmit the1011 Hz P25 Test Tone.
• ** marks the beginning of a DTMF command code for requesting remote keying of 1011 Hz test tone in P25 mode.
• The three 0 to 9 plus A, B, C, D digits is the ID code of the transmitter being requesting to do the remote keying
of 1011 test tone.
• The duration of the 1011 Hz P25 test tone transmission is user programmable (can be set to infinite).
• The 1011 Hz P25 test tone transmission can be stopped by another PTT from a subscriber radio.
• The pattern being generate is the Standard Tone Test Pattern as per TIA-102.CAAA Section 1.3.3.7 a).
• This feature must be enabled via RSS for both the receiver and transmitter.

Figure 2: Transmitter Remote 1011 Test Tone

Figure 3: Receiver Remote 1011 Test Tone

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN182 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 17

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 8

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN182 Battery Level Reporting and Remote P25 Test Tone
Subscriber DTMF Requirements
In P25 digital mode, the subscriber is required to have the capability to generate DTMF in P25 Digital mode (not
all P25 equipment supports this capability).
In analog mode the DTMF implementation can vary between different models of subscriber. As a consequence,
the analog DTMF decoder of each repeater receiver is required to be tuned to work with a particular subscriber
model. The procedure for this adjustment is described in the Receiver Analog DTMF Decoder Alignment Procedures.
More than one subscriber manufacturer / model may work, but to guarantee the best operation the most common
subscriber should be used to tune this feature. This is an issue with subscribers that Codan tries best to accommodate.
The subscriber and repeater also need to match the use of pre/de-emphasis or flat audio.

Battery Level Reporting DC Offset Adjustment Procedures
Tools Required:
DC volt meter
RSS version 1.7.6 or later
Steps:
1. Power up the transmitter.
2. Make sure the transmitter is not transmitting (keyed).
3. Connect to RSS via a USB cable.
4. Navigate to Service -> Extra Feature -> Battery Level Reporting (Tab)
5. Enable (and program) Battery Level Reporting if it is not already enabled.
6. Have the DC volt meter monitor the 13.8V line of the transmitter. Monitor this voltage where you would like the
battery reading to be taken from, for example, via the System Regulator (Monitor).
7. Click Read 13.8V line Button.
8. Adjust the Battery Reading Offset Adjustment field until the Battery Reading in the RSS matches the battery level
on the DC voltmeter.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 until the reading matches that of the DC voltmeter. (Allow 3 seconds between each click
of the Read Battery Voltage button. The transmitter internally only takes a reading every 2 seconds.)
10. Click Program to save the value.
11. Exit out of RSS.
Note: The calibration procedure is done with the transmitter under very little load. When the transmitter is transmitting,
the reading will be lower in comparison with the reading at the system regulator.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 8

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN182 Rev 1-0-0

Mar 17

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN182 Battery Level Reporting and Remote P25 Test Tone
Receiver Analog DTMF Decoder Alignment Procedures:
Tools Required:
Oscilloscope
Optional: Analog communication test set (eg. Marconi 2955)
RSS version 1.7.6 or later
Extender card
The subscriber model to be used with the receiver
Steps:
1. Connect the receiver to the sub-rack with the extender card or cable in between.
2. Have the Oscilloscope monitor Pin Z24 out of the back 48 pin connector of the receiver via the extender card.
J4-10 (RX A MODE) for RXA and J4-14 (RX B MODE) for RXB.
3. Do NOT connect a transmitter to the receiver via the front panel CNTL BUS.
4. Use RSS to program the repeater receiver to match the bandwidth and de-emphasis settings of the subscriber
(this is typically done for radio operation).
5. Navigate to Service -> Jumper Settings -> Output Pins.
6. Note the current selection for Pin Z24. You will need to program it back after tuning.
7. Select and Program “Analog DTMF Decode (High)” for Pin Z24 as shown in Figure 4.

Figure 4: DTMF Setup Output Pin Selection

8. Exit back to Service Window.
9. Select Extra Features.
10. Select Battery Level Reporting Tab

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN182 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 17

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 5 of 8

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN182 Battery Level Reporting and Remote P25 Test Tone
12. Turn on the Battery Level Reporting and click program if it is not already on.
The following values are a good starting point
5 : Detection Threshold for First Harmonics
100: Input Audio Sample Gain (Narrow Band)
100: Input Audio Sample Gain (Wide Band)

Figure 5: Receiver Battery Level Reporting

13. Use the subscriber to transmit each DTMF tone. As an Option you can have an analog communication test
monitor the subscriber at the same time with the demod output connected to one of the oscilloscope channels.
14. Figure 6 shows what the output at Pin Z24 looks like when it is tuned correctly for a particular subscriber.
A single pulse will correspond to each burst of different DTMF tone.

Figure 6: Oscilloscope showing DTMF output on Pin Z24 (Good Tune)

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 6 of 8

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN182 Rev 1-0-0

Mar 17

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN182 Battery Level Reporting and Remote P25 Test Tone
15. Figure 7 shows what the output at Pin Z24 may look like when it is not tuned correctly for a particular
subscriber.
More than a single pulse will correspond to some of the bursts of different DTMF tones.
You will sometimes see no pulse corresponding to some of the burst of different DTMF tones.

Figure 7: Oscilloscope showing DTMF output on Pin Z24 (Bad Tune)

16. Make the adjustment to the Detection Threshold for First Harmonics and/or the Input Audio Sample Gain so that
the result looks like Figure 6. Be sure to go through all possible DTMF tones.
17. Click Program to save the adjustment value.
18. Navigate to Service -> Jumper Settings -> Output Pins
19. Program back the previous setting for Pin Z24.
20. Exit RSS.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN182 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 17

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 7 of 8

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN182 Battery Level Reporting and Remote P25 Test Tone
This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 8 of 8

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN182 Rev 1-0-0

Mar 17

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN247 VR-4E VHF MT-4E Receiver
RECEIVER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

A D
SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF
REF
IN

USB
RF I N
CNTL
BUS

The VR-4E VHF receiver is an FM radio module capable of analog operation in 12.5 KHz
(narrowband) or 25 KHz (wideband) channels. A firmware upgrade may be purchased to
allow P25 digital operation. The VR-4E VHF receiver operates over the frequency band
from 136 to 174 MHz. A modular design allows each of the receiver’s internal modules to be
individually assembled and tested. This facilitates construction, tuning and maintenance as
well as troubleshooting procedures. The receiver can be programmed with up to 2 banks of
16 channels each.

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

Specifications
Frequency Band
Channel Spacing
Frequency Switching Range
Reference Sensitivity
(12 dB SINAD and 5% BER)
Adjacent Channel Rejection (Class A)
Adjacent Channel Rejection (Class B)
Conducted Spurious Output Power (Analog)
Intermodulation Rejection
Hum & Noise Ratio
L.O. Frequency Stability
Audio Distortion (Analog and Digital)
Audio Output Level (600  Balanced)
Operating Temperature
Supply Current (Class A)
Supply Current (Class B)

136 - 174 MHz
12.5, 15, 25 and 30 KHz
± 2 MHz
≤ -118 dBm (.280 μV)
≥ 45 dB; NB Analog / ≥ 75 dB; WB Analog / ≥ 60 dB; Digital
≥ 40 dB; NBAnalog / ≥ 70 dB; WB Analog / ≥ 60 dB; Digital
≤ -95 dBm (Class A) / ≤ -57 dBm (Class B)
≥ 75 dB Analog / ≥ 80 dB Digital (Class A)
≥ 70 dB Analog / ≥ 70 dB Digital (Class B)
≥ 34 dB Narrowband / ≥ 40 dB Wideband
± 1.0 ppm (-30°C to +60°C)
≤ 2.0 % (25°C); ≤ 3.0 % (-30°C to +60°C)
≤ +3.0 dBm
-30°C to +60°C
≤ 250 mA / ≤ 280 mA with encryption module
≤ 115 mA / ≤ 145 mA with encryption module

Models Available
VR-4E150-A0-000
VR-4E150-00-000

12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 136 - 174 MHz, Class A
12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 136 - 174 MHz, Class B

Receiver Operating Frequency
The receiver is initially aligned at the factory for the frequency shown on the label on the front panel. For a small
frequency change, no re-alignment of the receiver may be required. If the frequency change is greater than ±2 MHz
from the frequency at which the last complete receiver alignment was performed, the RF Preselector will need to
be realigned. To align and / or adjust the receiver, the outer cover needs to be removed; the receiver needs to be
plugged into the subrack via a cable and / or extender card; and power must be applied to the system.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN247 Rev 4-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN247 VR-4E VHF MT-4E Receiver

The VR-4E VHF receiver is primarily software-controlled, allowing tuning, programming and maintenance to be
done via software service with few hardware adjustments required.

RF Preselector Alignment:
Alignment for the RF Preselector consists of tuning the five-section helical filter only. There are two methods of
tuning the RF Preselector. The preferred method of tuning the RF Preselector is to use a Spectrum Analyzer with
a Tracking Generator. Ensure that the +9.5 Vdc supply is connected to the RF Preselector (red wire). Connect the
Tracking Generator output at a level of -20 dBm to the Receiver’s RF input. Connect the Spectrum Analyzer input to
the RF Preselector’s IF output (SMB cable normally connected to the Receiver Mainboard). Adjust the helical filter
trimmer capacitors for a flat response at a level typically -40 dBm to -65 dBm, centred at the desired RF frequency.
The alternate method of tuning the RF Preselector is to monitor receiver SINAD. Inject the desired RF signal to the
RF input connector at a level of -118 dBm and adjust the helical filter trimmer capacitors for best receiver SINAD (≤
-118 dBm).

RSS Service Mode:
The RSS has the ability to put a receiver into Service Mode, where the Reference Oscillator may be aligned, Audio
Levels may be set, Jumper Settings may be selected, a BER test can be performed, and an RSSI meter can be
monitored. To put the receiver into Service Mode, it must be connected to a PC running the Radio Service Software
(RSS) using a type A to 5-pin mini-type B USB cable. From the RSS Receiver Configuration window, click on the
Service button. Note that you must not remove power to the radio or swap radios during servicing. When any
required Service functions have been completed, the radio can be taken out of Service Mode by clicking on the Quit
button in the Service window.

Note: For complete alignment procedures, refer to the instruction manual. These notes are for reference only.
43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN247 Rev 4-1-0

Mar 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN267 UR-4E UHF MT-4E Receiver
RECEIVER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

A D
SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF
REF
IN

USB
RF I N
CNTL
BUS

The UR-4E UHF receiver is an FM radio module capable of analog operation in 12.5 KHz
(narrowband) or 25 KHz (wideband) channels. A firmware upgrade may be purchased to allow
P25 digital operation. The UR-4E UHF receiver operates in one of five frequency bands: 380
to 406 MHz, 406 to 430 MHz, 430 to 450 MHz, 450 to 470 MHz or 470 to 520 MHz. A modular
design allows each of the receiver’s internal modules to be individually assembled and tested.
This facilitates construction, tuning and maintenance as well as troubleshooting procedures.
The receiver can be programmed with up to 2 banks of 16 channels each.

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

Specifications
Frequency Bands
Channel Spacing
Frequency Switching Range
Reference Sensitivity
(12 dB SINAD and 5% BER)
Adjacent Channel Rejection (Class A)
Adjacent Channel Rejection (Class B)
Conducted Spurious Output Power (Analog)
Intermodulation Rejection
Hum & Noise Ratio
L.O. Frequency Stability
Audio Distortion (Analog and Digital)
Audio Output Level (600  Balanced)
Operating Temperature
Supply Current (Class A)
Supply Current (Class B)
Supply Current (380 & 440)

380 - 406 / 406 - 430 / 430 - 450 / 450 - 470 / 470 - 520 MHz
12.5 and 25 KHz
± 2 MHz
≤ -116 dBm (.350 μV) 380 & 440 & 500
≤ -118 dBm (.280 μV) 420 & 460
≥ 45 dB; NB Analog / ≥ 75 dB; WB Analog / ≥ 60 dB; Digital
≥ 40 dB; NB Analog / ≥ 70 dB; WB Analog / ≥ 60 dB; Digital
≤ -95 dBm (Class A & 380 & 440) / ≤ -80 dBm (500)
≤ -57 dBm (Class B)
≥ 75 dB Analog / ≥ 80 dB Digital (Class A & 380 & 440)
≥ 70 dB Analog / ≥ 70 dB Digital (Class B)
≥ 34 dB Narrowband / ≥ 40 dB Wideband
± 0.5 ppm (-30°C to +60°C)
≤ 2.0 % (25°C); ≤ 3.0 % (-30°C to +60°C)
≤ +3.0 dBm
-30°C to +60°C
≤ 250 mA / ≤ 280 mA with encryption module
≤ 115 mA / ≤ 145 mA with encryption module
≤ 270 mA / ≤ 300 mA with encryption module

Models Available
UR-4E380-00-000
UR-4E420-A0-000
UR-4E420-00-000
UR-4E440-00-000
UR-4E460-A0-000
UR-4E460-00-000
UR-4E500-00-000

12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 380 - 406 MHz, Class B
12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 406 - 430 MHz, Class A
12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 406 - 430 MHz, Class B
12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 430 - 450 MHz, Class B
12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 450 - 470 MHz, Class A
12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 450 - 470 MHz, Class B
12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 470 - 520 MHz, Class B * Not available in Canada

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN267 Rev 7-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN267 UR-4E UHF MT-4E Receiver

The UR-4E UHF receiver is primarily software-controlled, allowing tuning, programming and maintenance to be
done via software service with few hardware adjustments required.

RF Preselector Alignment:
Alignment for the RF Preselector consists of tuning the five-section helical filter only. There are two methods of
tuning the RF Preselector. The preferred method of tuning the RF Preselector is to use a Spectrum Analyzer with
a Tracking Generator. Ensure that the +9.5 Vdc supply is connected to the RF Preselector (red wire). Connect the
Tracking Generator output at a level of -20 dBm to the Receiver’s RF input. Connect the Spectrum Analyzer input
to the RF Preselector’s IF output (SMB cable normally connected to the Receiver Mainboard). Adjust the helical
filter trimmer capacitors for a flat response at a level typically -40 dBm to -65 dBm (-20 dBm to -40 dBm for Class
B), centred at the desired RF frequency. The alternate method of tuning the RF Preselector is to monitor receiver
SINAD. Inject the desired RF signal to the RF input connector at a level of -118 dBm and adjust the helical filter
trimmer capacitors for best receiver SINAD (≤ -118 dBm).

Note: For complete alignment procedures, refer to the instruction manual. These notes are for reference only.
43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN267 Rev 7-1-0

Mar 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN287 UR-4E UHF 700 / 800 / 900 MHz MT-4E Receiver
RECEIVER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

A D
SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF
REF
IN

USB
RF I N
CNTL
BUS

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

The UR-4E UHF 700 / 800 / 900 MHz receiver is an FM radio module capable of analog
operation in 12.5 KHz (narrowband) or 25 KHz (wideband) channels. A firmware upgrade may
be purchased to allow P25 digital operation. The UR-4E UHF 700 / 800 / 900 MHz receiver
operates in one of five frequency bands: 768 to 776 MHz, 798 to 824 MHz, 851 to 869 MHz,
896 to 902 MHz or 930 to 960 MHz. A modular design allows each of the receiver’s internal
modules to be individually assembled and tested. This facilitates construction, tuning and
maintenance as well as troubleshooting procedures. The receiver can be programmed with
up to 2 banks of 16 channels each.

Specifications
Frequency Bands
Channel Spacing
Frequency Switching Range
Reference Sensitivity
(12 dB SINAD and 5% BER)
Adjacent Channel Rejection
Conducted Spurious Output Power (Analog)
Intermodulation Rejection
Hum & Noise Ratio
L.O. Frequency Stability
Audio Distortion (Analog and Digital)
Audio Output Level (600  Balanced)
Operating Temperature
Supply Current

768 - 776 / 798 - 824 / 851 - 869 / 896 - 902 / 930 - 960 MHz
12.5 and 25 KHz
Full Band
≤ -116 dBm (.350 μV)
≥ 45 dB; NB Analog / ≥ 70 dB; WB Analog / ≥ 60 dB; Digital
≤ -80 dBm
≥ 70 dB
≥ 31 dB Narrowband / ≥ 37 dB Wideband
± 0.1 ppm (-30°C to +60°C)
≤ 3.0 % (25°C); ≤ 5.0 % (-30°C to +60°C)
≤ +3.0 dBm
-30°C to +60°C
≤ 200 mA / ≤ 230 mA with encryption module

Models Available
UR-4E768-00-000
UR-4E800-00-000
UR-4E850-00-000
UR-4E900-00-000
UR-4E950-00-000

12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 768 - 776 MHz, Class B
12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 798 - 824 MHz, Class B
12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 851 - 869 MHz, Class B
12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 896 - 902 MHz, Class B
12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 930 - 960 MHz, Class B

Receiver Operating Frequency
The receiver is initially aligned at the factory for the center of the frequency range and is programmed for the frequency
shown on the label on the front panel. No re-alignment of the receiver is required to change frequencies.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN287 Rev 5-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN287 UR-4E UHF 700 / 800 / 900 MHz MT-4E Receiver

The UR-4E UHF 700 / 800 / 900 MHz receiver is primarily software-controlled, allowing tuning, programming and
maintenance to be done via software service with few hardware adjustments required.

Note: For complete alignment procedures, refer to the instruction manual. These notes are for reference only.
43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN287 Rev 5-1-0

Mar 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN347 VT-4E VHF MT-4E Transmitter
TRANSMITTER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MICMODE
USB

CNTL
BUS
MIC

RF OUT

The VT-4E VHF transmitter is an FM radio module capable of analog operation in 12.5 KHz
(narrowband) or 25 KHz (wideband) channels. A firmware upgrade may be purchased to
allow P25 digital operation. The VT-4E VHF transmitter operates over the frequency band
from 136 to 174 MHz. A modular design allows each of the transmitter’s internal modules to
be individually assembled and tested. This facilitates construction, tuning and maintenance as
well as troubleshooting procedures. The transmitter can be programmed with up to 2 banks
of 16 channels each.

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

Specifications
Frequency Band
Channel Spacing
Frequency Switching Range
RF Output Power
Duty Cycle
Undesired Emissions (Conducted Spurious)
Undesired Emissions
(Adjacent Channel Power Ratio)
Intermodulation Attenuation
FM Hum & Noise Ratio
Carrier Frequency Stability
Emission Designators
Audio Distortion (60% of maximum deviation)
VSWR Protection
Operating Temperature
Standby Current
Transmit Current (8.0 W)

136 - 174 MHz
12.5, 15, 25 and 30 KHz
Full Band; ± 0.5 MHz for VSWR alarm
0.5 to 8.0 Watts adjustable
100% (-30°C to +60°C)
≤ -70 dBc @ 8.0 Watts
≤ -60 dBc; Narrowband Analog / ≤ -70 dBc; Wideband Analog
≤ -70 dBc; Digital
≥ 45 dB
≥ 42 dB; Narrowband / ≥ 48 dB; Wideband
± 1.0 ppm (-30°C to +60°C)
Analog: 11K0F3E (Narrowband); 16K0F3E (Wideband)
Paging: 9K20F1D
P25 Digital: 8K10F1E (Digital Voice); 8K10F1D (Digital Data)
≤ 3.0% (-30°C to +60°C)
≤ 20:1 VSWR (All Phase Angles)
-30°C to +60°C
≤ 50 mA / ≤ 80 mA with encryption module
≤ 2.80 A

Models Available
VT-4E150-00-800

12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 0.5 - 8.0 W, 136 - 174 MHz

Transmitter Operating Frequency
The transmitter is initially aligned at the factory for the frequency shown on the label on the front panel. For a small
frequency change, no re-alignment of the transmitter may be required. If the frequency change is greater than
±0.5 MHz from the frequency at which the last complete transmitter alignment was performed, the VSWR alarm
/ overload (if used) will need to be realigned. To align and / or adjust the transmitter, the outer cover needs to be
removed; the transmitter needs to be plugged into the subrack via a cable and / or extender card; and power must
be applied to the system. A 50  dummy load should be connected to the RF output when transmitting.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN347 Rev 5-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

May 14

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN347 VT-4E VHF MT-4E Transmitter

The VT-4E VHF transmitter is primarily software controlled, allowing tuning, programming and maintenance to be
done via software service with few hardware adjustments required.

VSWR Alarm / Overload Adjustment:
The VSWR alarm / overload only requires adjustment if the VSWR Alarm is being used. When the VSWR alarm /
overload circuit is properly set, the Amplifier is protected from excessive antenna VSWR by reducing the amplifier’s
gain when an overload condition occurs. If the VSWR alarm is not set, the amplifier is still protected by a current
limiter circuit. The circuit limits Amplifier current draw to 2.0 Amps and protects the Amplifier from damage.
To set the VSWR alarm / overload circuit properly, the RF power level must be set to the desired RF power output
first. After the RF power level is properly set, rotate the VSWR alarm adjust potentiometer (RV3) fully counter
clockwise. Terminate the transmitter with a 3:1 mismatch load and connect a voltmeter to Pin 5 of connector J1 in
the transmitter. Slowly adjust the VSWR alarm adjust potentiometer (RV3) clockwise until Pin 5 reads +2.5 Vdc, or
a noticeable drop (10% of total current or more) in current on the +13.8 Vdc line occurs.

RSS Service Mode:
The RSS has the ability to put a transmitter into Service Mode, where the Reference Oscillator may be aligned,
Audio Levels, Subtone Deviation Levels and RF Power Levels may be set, Jumper Settings may be selected, and
Test Patterns can be generated. To put the transmitter into Service Mode, it must be connected to a PC running
the Radio Service Software (RSS) using a type A to 5 pin mini-type B USB cable. From the RSS Transmitter
Configuration window, click on the Service button. When any required Service functions have been completed, the
radio can be taken out of Service Mode by clicking on the Quit button in the Service window.
NOTE: Do not remove power to the radio or swap radios during servicing.

Note: For complete alignment procedures, refer to the instruction manual. These notes are for reference only.
43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN347 Rev 5-0-0

May 14

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN367 UT-4E UHF MT-4E Transmitter
TRANSMITTER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MICMODE
USB

CNTL
BUS
MIC

RF OUT

The UT-4E UHF transmitter is an FM radio module capable of analog operation in 12.5 KHz
(narrowband) or 25 KHz (wideband) channels. A firmware upgrade may be purchased to
allow P25 digital operation. The UT-4E UHF transmitter operates in one of three frequency
bands: 380 to 406 MHz, 406 to 470 MHz or 470 to 520 MHz. A modular design allows each
of the transmitter’s internal modules to be individually assembled and tested. This facilitates
construction, tuning and maintenance as well as troubleshooting procedures. The transmitter
can be programmed with up to 2 banks of 16 channels each.

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

Specifications
Frequency Bands
Channel Spacing
Frequency Switching Range
RF Output Power
Duty Cycle
Undesired Emissions (Conducted Spurious)
Undesired Emissions
(Adjacent Channel Power Ratio)
Intermodulation Attenuation
FM Hum & Noise Ratio
Carrier Frequency Stability
Emission Designators
Audio Distortion (60% of maximum deviation)
VSWR Protection
Operating Temperature
Standby Current
Transmit Current (8.0 W)

380 - 406 / 406 - 470 MHz / 470 - 520 MHz
12.5 and 25 KHz
Full Band; ± 0.5 MHz for VSWR alarm
0.5 to 8.0 Watts adjustable or 0.5 to 6.0 Watts adjustable
100% (-30°C to +60°C)
≤ -70 dBc (-31 dBm @ 6 / 8 W) 380 & 450; (-32 dBm @ 6W) 500
≤ -60 dBc; Narrowband Analog / ≤ -70 dBc; Wideband Analog
≤ -67 dBc; Digital
≥ 40 dB (380) / ≥ 45 dB (450 & 500)
≥ 40 dB NB ; ≥ 46 dB WB (380) / ≥ 38 dB NB ; ≥ 44 dB WB (450)
≥ 34 dB; NB ; ≥ 40 dB; WB (500)
± 0.5 ppm (-30°C to +60°C)
Analog: 11K0F3E (Narrowband); 16K0F3E (Wideband)
Paging: 9K20F1D
P25 Digital: 8K10F1E (Digital Voice); 8K10F1D (Digital Data)
≤ 3.0% (-30°C to +60°C)
≤ 20:1 VSWR (All Phase Angles)
-30°C to +60°C
≤ 50 mA / ≤ 80 mA with encryption module
≤ 2.80 A

Models Available
UT-4E380-00-800
UT-4E450-00-800
UT-4E500-00-800

12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 0.5 - 6.0 W, 380 - 406 MHz
12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 0.5 - 8.0 W, 406 - 470 MHz
12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 0.5 - 6.0 W, 470 - 520 MHz *Not available in Canada

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN367 Rev 5-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

May 14

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN367 UT-4E UHF MT-4E Transmitter

The UT-4E UHF transmitter is primarily software controlled, allowing tuning, programming and maintenance to be
done via software service with few hardware adjustments required.

Note: For complete alignment procedures, refer to the instruction manual. These notes are for reference only.
43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN367 Rev 5-0-0

May 14

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN387 UT-4E UHF 700 / 800 / 900 MHz MT-4E Transmitter
TRANSMITTER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MICMODE
USB

CNTL
BUS
MIC

RF OUT

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

The UT-4E UHF 700 / 800 / 900 MHz transmitter is an FM radio module capable of analog
operation in 12.5 KHz (narrowband), 25 KHz (wideband) or 20 KHz (NPSPAC) channels. A
firmware upgrade may be purchased to allow P25 digital operation. The UT-4E UHF 700
/ 800 / 900 MHz transmitter operates in one of two frequency bands: 768 to 869 MHz or
896 to 960 MHz. A modular design allows each of the transmitter’s internal modules to be
individually assembled and tested. This facilitates construction, tuning and maintenance as
well as troubleshooting procedures. The transmitter can be programmed with up to 2 banks
of 16 channels each.

Audio Distortion (60% of maximum deviation)
VSWR Protection
Operating Temperature
Standby Current
Transmit Current (3.0 W)

768 - 869 MHz / 896 - 960 MHz
12.5 and 25 KHz (20 KHz NPSPAC; 850 only)
Full Band; ± 0.5 MHz for VSWR alarm
0.5 to 3.0 Watts adjustable
100% (-30°C to +60°C)
≤ -80 dBc (-45 dBm @ 3.0 Watts) 850
≤ -65 dBc (-30 dBm @ 3.0 Watts) 900
≤ -50 dBc; Narrowband Analog / ≤ -60 dBc; Wideband Analog
≤ -67 dBc; Digital
≥ 40 dB
≥ 34 dB; NB ; ≥ 40 dB; WB ; ≥ 35 dB; NPSPAC (850)
≥ 31 dB; NB ; ≥ 37 dB; WB ; ≥ 35 dB; NPSPAC (900)
± 0.1 ppm (-30°C to +60°C)
Analog: 11K0F3E (Narrowband); 16K0F3E (Wideband)
Analog: 14K0F3E (20 KHz NPSPAC 850 only)
Paging: 9K20F1D (Narrowband); 16K0F1D (Wideband)
P25 Digital: 8K10F1E (Digital Voice); 8K10F1D (Digital Data)
≤ 3.0% (-30°C to +60°C)
≤ 20:1 VSWR (All Phase Angles)
-30°C to +60°C
≤ 115 mA / ≤ 145 mA with encryption module
≤ 1.80 A

Models Available
UT-4E850-00-300
UT-4E900-00-300

12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 0.5 - 3.0 W, 768 - 869 MHz
12.5 / 25 KHz Bandwidth, 0.5 - 3.0 W, 896 - 960 MHz

Transmitter Operating Frequency
The transmitter is initially aligned at the factory for the frequency shown on the label on the front panel. For a small
frequency change, no re-alignment of the transmitter may be required. If the frequency change is greater than
±0.5 MHz from the frequency at which the last complete transmitter alignment was performed, the VSWR alarm
/ overload (if used) will need to be realigned. To align and / or adjust the transmitter the outer cover needs to be
removed, the transmitter needs to be plugged into the subrack via a cable and / or extender card and power must
be applied to the system. A 50  dummy load should be connected to the RF output when transmitting.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN387 Rev 6-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

May 14

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN387 UT-4E UHF 700 / 800 / 900 MHz MT-4E Transmitter

The UT-4E UHF 700 / 800 / 900 MHz transmitter is primarily software controlled, allowing tuning, programming and
maintenance to be done via software service with few hardware adjustments required.

Note: For complete alignment procedures, refer to the instruction manual. These notes are for reference only.
43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN387 Rev 6-0-0

May 14

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN441 AMP-4 VHF and UHF 30 Watt Power Amplifiers
POWER AMPLIFIER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

RF OUTPUT

PWR CTRL
TX
G/F
VSWR
RF INPUT

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

The AMP-4 30 Watt power amplifier operates in one of three frequency bands: 136
to 174 MHz, 380 to 430 MHz or 450 to 520 MHz. The power amplifier is rated for
continuous duty at an adjustable RF output power of 20 to 30 Watts. The output
power is adjusted either using the front panel potentiometer (local mode) or by a
voltage via the rear panel connector (remote mode). The local and remote mode
output power control is determined by a hardware jumper on the inside of the power
amplifier. The AMP-4 was designed to mate with any of the MT-3 / MT-4 transmitter
exciter modules.. The input to the power amplifier cannot exceed 8.0 Watts.

Specifications
Frequency Band
RF Output Power
RF Input Power Range (from exciter)
Duty Cycle
Undesired Emissions: Conducted Spurious
(Includes Harmonics)
Undesired Emissions: Radiated Spurious
Intermodulation Attenuation
Thermal
Fan
VSWR Protection
Operating Temperature
Output Impedance
Standby Current Drain
Transmit Current Drain

136 - 174 MHz / 380 - 430 MHz / 450 - 520 MHz
20 to 30 Watts adjustable
6.4 to 8.0 Watts (VHF) / 6.0 to 8.0 Watts (UHF)
100% (-30°C to +60°C)
≤ -70 dBc
≤ -13 dBm (≤ 57.8 dBc)
≥ 40 dB
Thermal interlock disables @ +80°C (± 5°C) / +176°F
Resets at +70°C (± 7°C) / +158°F
Fan activates @ +60°C (± 5°C) / +140°F
Resets @ +40°C / +104°F
≤ 20:1 VSWR (All Phase Angles)
-30°C to +60°C
50 
≤ 5 mA
≤ 7.00 A

Models Available
AMP-4-150-30-00
AMP-4-410-30-00
AMP-4-470-30-00

FM, 20 - 30 Watts continuous duty, 136 - 174 MHz
FM, 20 - 30 Watts continuous duty, 380 - 430 MHz
FM, 20 - 30 Watts continuous duty, 450 - 470 MHz

Guide Rails in Subrack for Power Amplifier:
The AMP-4 is installed in the subrack (taking up a transmitter and receiver slot) and is mated with a transmitter
exciter. Additional guide rails are required to be mounted in the subrack to support the AMP-4 properly. The
amplifier can be mounted in slot “A” or slot “B” in the subrack. A guide strip at the top of the subrack will help to
place the guide rails in the proper position by following the numbers on the guide strip. Only the top portion of the
subrack is labeled. Guide rails must be added or removed in the same position on the bottom as on the top.
Remove any guide rails that were used to hold the AMP-2 amplifier. These guide rails will be located at number
20/21 for slot “A” and number 48/49 for slot “B”. Install guide rails at number 11/12 and 34/35 for slot “A” and number
39/40 and 62/63 for slot “B”.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN441 Rev 2-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Jul 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN441 AMP-4 VHF and UHF 30 Watt Power Amplifiers
Power Amplifier Alignment:
Before aligning the 30 Watt Power Amplifier, the Transmitter Exciter should be tuned properly following the alignment
procedures in the Technical Notes or Instruction Manual for the transmitter. Disable the output power alarm,
VSWR alarm, and VSWR overload by turning the adjustment pots fully counter clockwise (if applicable, depending
on use and model). Set the RF output power at 6.4 Watts. Do not exceed 8.0 Watts at any time into the power
amplifier.
Connect the transmitter exciter RF output to the power amplifier input using the 37 cm cable supplied with the power
amplifier. Connect the Wattmeter to the power amplifier output and key the exciter by flipping the switch on the front
panel to KEY TX.
If jumper J1 on the amplifier is set for Local Mode (default), adjust the front panel
PWR CTRL (Power Control) pot to obtain the desired RF output power on the
wattmeter.
If jumper J1 is set for Remote Mode, set the voltage on Pin Z22, on the rear
connector of the power amplifier, to obtain the desired RF output power on the
wattmeter. Pin Z22 can be accessed on an auxiliary panel on the back of the
subrack. The Remote Power Control Voltage range is 0 to 9.5 Vdc.

Power Control

1 2 3

Remote

1 2 3
Local

Power Amplifier LEDs and Alarms:
The AMP-4 has a heavy duty and a thermally switched cooling fan. The power amplifier has three LEDs on the front
panel and three open connector alarm outputs at the rear connector.
The green TX LED illuminates when the power amplifier is transmitting greater than 20 Watts. When the output
power is less than 20 Watts, the “Low TX Output” open collector alarm on Pin B26 will activate.
The red G/F (General Fault) LED is a combination of two alarms: the heatsink temperature and the supply
voltage.
The G/F LED will illuminate in standby mode when the heatsink temperature exceeds 80°C (176°F) and will reset
when the temperature falls below 70°C (158°F).
The G/F LED will illuminate in active mode (transmit) when the supply voltage exceeds +17.8 Vdc and will reset
when the supply voltage is reduced to +17.3 Vdc.
When the G/F LED illuminates, the “General Fault” open collector alarm on Pin B24 will activate, and the power
amplifier turns off the voltage regulator to the RF and main control circuits to enter a low power mode
The red VSWR LED illuminates when the power amplifier has a VSWR of 2.1:1 to 4.0:1. When the VSWR LED
illuminates, the “VSWR” open collector alarm on Pin Z26 will activate.

Note: For complete alignment procedures, refer to the instruction manual. These notes are for reference only.
43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN441 Rev 2-0-0

Jul 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN490 19” Rack Mount High Power Amplifiers

FRONT VIEW

REAR VIEW

RF IN

DC ON
LOW OUTPUT
HIGH VSWR
HIGH TEMP

ALARM GND

SH/D CTRL

FAN+ GND

+13.8 VDC

RF OUT

GND

The 19” rack mount high power amplifiers are available in VHF, UHF and 700 / 800 MHz frequency bands. The
power amplifiers are rated for continuous duty at an RF output power of 60 - 110, 80 or 100 Watts and is designed
to fit in 7” (4 RU) of rack space.

Specifications
Frequency Bands

RF Output Power (factory set)
RF Input Power Range (from exciter)
Spurious & Harmonics

Duty Cycle
Load VSWR Tolerance
Output Impedance
Tx Current Drain @ 60 W (VHF)
Tx Current Drain @ 110 W (VHF)
Tx Current Drain @ 100 W (UHF)
Tx Current Drain @ 80 W (700 / 800 MHz)
Weight
Depth
Vertical Rack Space
Horizontal Mounting

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN490 Rev 2-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

136 - 144 MHz / 144 - 152 MHz (VHF)
152 - 162 MHz / 162 - 174 MHz (VHF)
406 - 450 MHz / 450 - 512 MHz (UHF)
768 - 869 MHz (700 / 800 MHz)
60 - 110 Watts (VHF)
100 Watts (UHF)
80 Watts (700 / 800 MHz)
5.0 to 10.0 Watts (VHF and UHF)
2.0 to 5.0 Watts (700 / 800 MHz)
≤ -63 dBc @ 60 Watts RF output (VHF)
≤ -65 dBc @ 110 Watts RF output (VHF)
≤ -70 dBc @ 100 Watts RF output (UHF)
≤ -70 dBc @ 80 Watts RF output (700 / 800 MHz)
100% (-30°C to +60°C)
VSWR Protected above 2.5:1
50 
17 A (typical) / 22 A (maximum)
22 A (typical) / 25 A (maximum)
21 A (typical) / 25 A (maximum)
20 A (typical) / 24 A (maximum)
10 lbs
19.0 inches
7.0 inches (4 RU)
3.4 inches

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN490 19” Rack Mount High Power Amplifiers
VHF Rear Panel Mount
The VHF power amplifier is available in both a 19”
rack mount package and a rear panel mount that
attaches to the back of the Codan subrack. The
rear panel mount cannot be used with an A-PNLAUX96-3 Auxiliary Connector or the rear panel
mount AC to DC or DC to DC Power Supplies.
The rear panel mount amplifier does not come
with the LED indicators but does maintain the
ALARM, CTRL and SH/D pins.

Models Available
AMP-140-110-D1P
AMP-140-110-D1R
AMP-148-110-D1P
AMP-148-110-D1R
AMP-157-110-D1P
AMP-157-110-D1R
AMP-168-110-D1P
AMP-168-110-D1R
AMP-428-100-D1R
AMP-481-100-D1R
AMP-817-080-D1R

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 4

Rear Panel Mount, 60 - 110 Watts continuous duty, 136 - 144 MHz
Rack Mount, 60 - 110 Watts continuous duty, 136 - 144 MHz
Rear Panel Mount, 60 - 110 Watts continuous duty, 144 - 152 MHz
Rack Mount, 60 - 110 Watts continuous duty, 144 - 152 MHz
Rear Panel Mount, 60 - 110 Watts continuous duty, 152 - 162 MHz
Rack Mount, 60 - 110 Watts continuous duty, 152 - 162 MHz
Rear Panel Mount, 60 - 110 Watts continuous duty, 162 - 174 MHz
Rack Mount, 60 - 110 Watts continuous duty, 162 - 174 MHz
Rack Mount, 100 Watts continuous duty, 406 - 450 MHz
Rack Mount, 100 Watts continuous duty, 450 - 512 MHz
Rack Mount, 80 Watts continuous duty, 768 - 869 MHz

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN490 Rev 2-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN490 19” Rack Mount High Power Amplifiers
Power Amplifier Operation
The 19” rack mount high power amplifer has a heavy duty heatsink and an RF switched cooling fan. The power
amplifier has four standard LEDs (not available on the VHF rear panel mount), and a summary alarm pin.
The LEDs operate as follows:
Label
DC ON
LOW OUTPUT
HIGH VSWR
HIGH TEMP

Color
Green
Red
Red
Red

Description
Activates when DC power is connected.
Activates when the output power drops to 80-85% of output power.
Activates when VSWR exceeds 2.5:1.
Activates when the amplifier exceeds safe operating temperature.

The three pins on the rear of the amplifier operate as follows:
Pin
ALARM
CTRL
SH/D

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN490 Rev 2-0-0

Description
A summary alarm that activates (< 1 Vdc) when any of three alarm conditions activate
(Low Output, High VSWR or High Temp).
When this pin is pulled to ground, the output power is reduced by 1 to 1.5 dB.
When this pin is pulled to ground through a 0 to 50 K Ohm resistor,
the output power is reduced by up to 4 dB.

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN490 19” Rack Mount High Power Amplifiers

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN490 Rev 2-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN491 Modular 5-Pack Series High Power Amplifiers
FRONT VIEW

DC ON

LOW OUTPUT

HIGH VSWR

REAR VIEW

HIGH TEMP

RF IN

ALARM

+13.8 VDC
GND

RF OUT

RF POWER AMPLIFIER

The modular 5-pack series high power amplifiers are available in VHF, UHF and 700 / 800 MHz frequency bands.
The power amplifiers are rated for continuous duty at an RF output power of 80 or 100 Watts. Designed to be fully
modular and space efficient, the 5-pack series allows for 5 amplifiers in 4 RU of rack space using a 19” subrack.

Specifications
Frequency Bands

RF Output Power (factory set)
RF Input Power Range (from exciter)
Spurious & Harmonics
Duty Cycle
Load VSWR Tolerance
Output Impedance
Tx Current Drain @ 100 W (VHF)
Tx Current Drain @ 100 W (UHF)
Tx Current Drain @ 80 W (700 / 800 MHz)
Weight
Depth
Vertical Rack Space
Horizontal Mounting

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN491 Rev 2-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

136 - 144 MHz / 144 - 152 MHz (VHF)
152 - 162 MHz / 162 - 174 MHz (VHF)
406 - 450 MHz / 450 - 512 MHz (UHF)
764 - 870 MHz (700 / 800 MHz)
100 Watts (VHF and UHF)
80 Watts (700 / 800 MHz)
5.0 to 10.0 Watts (VHF and UHF)
2.0 to 5.0 Watts (700 / 800 MHz)
≤ -65 dBc @ 100 Watts RF output (VHF)
≤ -70 dBc @ 100 Watts RF output (UHF)
≤ -70 dBc @ 80 Watts RF output (700 / 800 MHz)
100% (-30°C to +60°C)
VSWR Protected above 2.5:1
50 
18 A (typical) / 23 A (maximum)
21 A (typical) / 25 A (maximum)
20 A (typical) / 24 A (maximum)
10 lbs
19.0 inches
7.0 inches (4 RU)
3.4 inches

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN491 Modular 5-Pack Series High Power Amplifiers
Models Available
A-RACK19-AMP-02

19” Subrack for 5-Pack Series Amplifiers, holds up to 5 amps

AMP-140-100-D1M
AMP-148-100-D1M
AMP-157-100-D1M
AMP-168-100-D1M
AMP-428-100-D1M
AMP-481-100-D1M
AMP-817-080-D1M

5 Pack Series, 100 Watts continuous duty, 136 - 144 MHz
5 Pack Series, 100 Watts continuous duty, 144 - 152 MHz
5 Pack Series, 100 Watts continuous duty, 152 - 162 MHz
5 Pack Series, 100 Watts continuous duty, 162 - 174 MHz
5 Pack Series, 100 Watts continuous duty, 406 - 450 MHz
5 Pack Series, 100 Watts continuous duty, 450 - 512 MHz
5 Pack Series, 100 Watts continuous duty, 768 - 869 MHz

Power Amplifier Operation
The Modular 5-pack Series high power amplifer has a heavy duty heatsink and an RF switched cooling fan. The
power amplifier has four standard LEDs, and a summary alarm pin.
The LEDs operate as follows:
Label
DC ON
LOW OUTPUT
HIGH VSWR
HIGH TEMP

Color
Green
Red
Red
Red

The ALARM pin on the rear of the amplifier operates as follows:
Pin
ALARM

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Description
A summary alarm that activates (< 1 Vdc)when any of three alarm conditions activate
(Low Output, High VSWR or High Temp).

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN491 Rev 2-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN500 SR-39-1 Subrack
The SR-39-1 subrack is designed to hold and interconnect the MT-3 and MT-4 series of receiver, transmitter
and control modules on one universal motherboard. This Type 84 motherboard makes extensive use of cage
jacks to interconnect the A and B systems supporting a number of field configurations. Additional auxiliary control
connectors provide easy access to virtually all control and audio lines, simplifying many standard base / repeater
configurations. Modules may be inserted in the subrack in many various configurations as shown in Figure 1. The
Control 1 connector is used for the base or repeater control card or paging modulator. The Optional Control 2 card
is for custom systems requiring specialized paging / data / audio interconnections and is not normally used. If the
radio system is ordered with antenna relays, the system regulator with the relays is housed in a larger module that
encompasses the area for the Control 2 module. The subrack has room for two transmitter and receiver pairs. The
left side connectors are reserved for transmitter and receiver A (C in second subrack) respectively, while the right
side connectors are reserved for transmitter and receiver B (D in second subrack). Although any transmitter and
receiver can be placed in either of the respective slots, convention usually follows that the lower frequency radios
will go in slots A and the higher in slots B to D.
CONTROL
1

TRANSMITTER
A

RECEIVER
A

TRANSMITTER
B

RECEIVER
B

SYSTEM
REGULATOR

OPTIONAL
CONTROL
2

Figure 1: Standard Subrack

A quadruple system is shown in Figure 2 with A and B pairs in the first rack, and C and D pairs in the second rack.
This system requires a multiple link controller and two system regulators.
MULTIPLE LINK CONTROLLER

BLANK
PANEL

TRANSMITTER
A

RECEIVER
A

TRANSMITTER
B

RECEIVER
B

SYSTEM
REGULATOR

BLANK
PANEL

TRANSMITTER
C

RECEIVER
C

TRANSMITTER
D

RECEIVER
D

SYSTEM
REGULATOR

BLANK
PANEL

Figure 2: Dual Subracks for Multiple Link Configuration

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN500 Rev 5-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN500 SR-39-1 Subrack
If a VHF or UHF power amplifier is installed, only one transmitter and receiver pair can be installed since the power
amplifier takes up two slots, as shown in Figure 3.
CONTROL
1

TRANSMITTER
A

RECEIVER
A

POWER AMPLIFIER
A

SYSTEM
REGULATOR

OPTIONAL
CONTROL
2

Figure 3: Subrack with Power Amplifier

If two transceivers are used with power amplifiers, the power amplifiers are normally installed in a second subrack
as shown in Figure 4. This keeps all of the audio and control signal routing to a single subrack, simplifying the
system. A second system regulator and the mulitiple link controller are not required for this configuration.
CONTROL
1

BLANK
PANEL

TRANSMITTER
A

RECEIVER
A

POWER AMPLIFIER
A

TRANSMITTER
B

RECEIVER
B

SYSTEM
REGULATOR

OPTIONAL
CONTROL
2

BLANK
PANEL

POWER AMPLIFIER
B

Figure 4: Dual Subracks with Two Power Amplifiers

The 96 pin auxiliary control connector, located on the back of the motherboard (facing rear of the subrack), has 96
pins and provides access to virtually all signal and power lines on the motherboard. Many repeater configurations
can be implemented by interconnecting some of these lines through a mating 96 pin connector. Additionally,
external equipment can also be connected to the repeater through the auxiliary control connector, allowing for more
extensive radio control (i.e., DC remotes, tone remotes etc.). Note: The + and - DC lines from the auxiliary control
connector are not fused. Use caution with these lines so that interconnect cables are not overloaded.

DB25 Connector to CI-RC-4M-G2
Connector J12 is a female DB25 connector which can be used for connecting audio, channel select and control
signal lines to a CI-RC-4M-G2 (second generation) multiple link controller. When connecting to a CI-RC-4M-G2, a
standard straight-through male-to-male DB25 cable can be used.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN500 Rev 5-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN500 SR-39-1 Subrack
Power Input
The main power input (+10 to +17 Vdc; +13.8 Vdc nominal) connector is located at the back of the subrack, on
the motherboard. There is an identical +9.5 Vdc power output connector on the motherboard that is used to
power other Codan equipment at +9.5 Vdc (the CI-RC-4M-G2 controller, for example).
NOTE: Do not connect the main power input to the +9.5 Vdc power output connector, as a transient suppressor
(over voltage protection) will short to ground to protect the equipment.
Reverse voltage protection and over voltage protection (transient suppressor) is provided at the main power input
as well as the +9.5 Vdc line. The main power input is protected with a standard fast-blow 15 amp fuse. These
components may require replacing if the power supply is not connected properly, or even after a power surge or
a lightning strike. The two transient suppressors have different voltage ratings for the main power input and +9.5
Vdc lines. Figure 5 shows the subrack / motherboard rear view.

Antenna Relay Activation
The motherboard on the subrack contains a set of jumpers that are used to activate the optional antenna relays in
the System Regulator module from the Transmitter PTT IN and PTT OUT signal lines.
JU36
JU39
JU42
JU45

TXA PTT OUT activates Relay A
TXA PTT OUT activates Relay B
TXB PTT OUT activates Relay A
TXB PTT OUT activates Relay B

JU37
JU40
JU43
JU46

TXA PTT IN activates Relay A
TXA PTT IN activates Relay B
TXB PTT IN activates Relay A
TXB PTT IN activates Relay B

Simplex Operation
The motherboard on the subrack contains a set of jumpers that are enabled when the radio system is operated in
simplex mode (simplex base station or simplex links). The jumper connects the Transmitter PTT OUT signal line
to the RX MUTE. This jumper will cause the receiver to mute when the transmitter is keyed.
JU38
JU44

TXA PTT OUT mutes RXA
TXB PTT OUT mutes RXA

JU41
JU47

TXA PTT OUT mutes RXB
TXB PTT OUT mutes RXB

DB25 Connector to DSP-223 and IP-223 / IP-224
Connector J10 is a female DB25 connector which can be used for basic base connections. When connected to a
Telex DSP-223 or IP-223 / IP-224, a standard straight-through male-to-male DB25 cable can be used with some
motherboard jumper changes. The IP-224 requires a female DB25 to male DB37 adapter. The IP-223 / IP-224
also requires that 2 pins on the DB25 (PTT COM - pin2 and MON COM - pin 16) are wired to ground for proper
operation. The DB25 can also be jumpered for Balanced Audio direct to / from the receiver / transmitter or Auxiliary
Audio (recommended) through the controller.
WARNING: JU108 must be configured correctly for DSP-223 or IP-223 / IP-224 or damage can occur.
JU104
JU105
JU106

A = RX A Bal O/P2 or B = AUX 1 AUD O/P2
A = TX A Bal I/P2 or B = AUX 1 AUD I/P2
A = TX A Bal I/P1 or B = AUX 1 AUD I/P1

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN500 Rev 5-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

JU107
JU108
JU109

A = RX A Bal O/P1 or B = AUX AUD O/P1
A = DSP-223 / +13.8 V or B = IP-223 & IP-224 / RX A COR
TX A SEC / CLR I/P (installed to enable TX A SEC / CLR I/P)

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN500 SR-39-1 Subrack
Channel and Bank Select
MT-4E radio modules are capable of 16 channel operation in 2 banks (32 channels total). The 16 channels are
controlled via four CSEL signal lines connected to each receiver and transmitter module. The CSEL signal lines
are set as either a 0 (0 Vdc) or a 1 (+9.5 Vdc).
JU48
JU50
JU52
JU54
JU56
JU58
JU60
JU62
JU64
JU66
JU68
JU70

TX A Channel select lines +9.5 V pullup enable
TX A CSEL 0
TX A CSEL 2
TX A Bank select A = Bank A, B = Bank B
RX A CSEL 1
RX A CSEL 3
TX B Channel select lines +9.5 V pullup enable
TX B CSEL 0
TX B CSEL 2
TX B Bank select A = Bank A, B = Bank B
RX B CSEL 1
RX B CSEL 3

JU49
JU51
JU53
JU55
JU57
JU59
JU61
JU63
JU65
JU67
JU69
JU71

+13.8 Vdc LINE
TRANSIENT SUPPRESSOR
(2007-1N637800) &
REVERSE VOLTAGE DIODE
(2001-MR751000)
15 AMP FAST
BLOW FUSE
POWER INPUT
(5604-5GAGC150)
+10 to +17 Vdc
+13.8 Vdc NOMINAL

DB25
CONNECTOR
FOR CI-RC-4M-G2

RX A Channel select lines +9.5 V pullup enable
TX A CSEL 1
TX A CSEL 3
RX A CSEL 0
RX A CSEL 2
RX A Bank select A = Bank A, B = Bank B
RX B Channel select lines +9.5 V pullup enable
TX B CSEL 1
TX B CSEL 3
RX B CSEL 0
RX B CSEL 2
RX B Bank select A = Bank A, B = Bank B

+9.5 Vdc LINE
TRANSIENT SUPPRESSOR
(2007-1N637500) &
REVERSE VOLTAGE DIODE
(2001-MR751000)

+9.5 Vdc REGULATED
POWER INPUT /
OUTPUT
(NOT TYPICALLY USED)

DB25
JUMPERS

DB25
CONNECTOR
FOR CI-DSP-223
AND CI-IP-223

B SIDE
A SIDE
BANK AND CHANNEL
BANK AND CHANNEL
SELECT & PULL-UP
SELECT AND PULL-UP
JUMPERS
JUMPERS
ANTENNA RELAY
& RX MUTE
ACTIVATION
JUMPERS

Figure 5: Rear View of Subrack

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN500 Rev 5-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN520 SR-39-3 Multiple Receiver Subrack
The SR-39-3 subrack is designed to hold and interconnect the MT-3 and MT-4 series of receivers on one universal
motherboard. The SR-39-3 subrack holds up to five receiver modules and one system regulator (the system regulator
will require jumpers JU15 to JU24 installed for multiple receiver subrack compatibility) as shown in Figure 1.
The multiple receiver subrack is ideal for voting receivers or with the mutliple transmitter subrack for multi-channel
trunking systems.

RECEIVER
A

RECEIVER
B

RECEIVER
C

RECEIVER
D

RECEIVER
E

SYSTEM
REGULATOR

Figure 1: Multiple Receiver Subrack

The multiple receiver subrack does not interconnect the different receivers but brings control lines and audio out to
connection points on the rear of the subrack. The external control connectors allow access to the following signals
on each receiver:
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Name
RX CSEL 3
RX CSEL 2
RX CSEL 1
RX CSEL 0
RX COR RLY COM1
RX RLY NC1/NO1
RX COR
RX DISC/FL/DE

9
10
11

RX SQL OVER
RX SYN LOCK DET (Spare)
RX PRIORITY COR

12
13
14
15
16

RX RSSI
RX BAL O/P 2
RX BAL O/P 1
RX MUTE
GND

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN520 Rev 3-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

Function
Receiver channel select line No. 3
Receiver channel select line No. 2
Receiver channel select line No. 1
Receiver channel select line No. 0
Receiver Carrier Operated Relay Common 1
Receiver Relay Normally Open / Normally Closed
Receiver Carrier Operated Relay output
Receiver Disc or Flat or De-emphasis audio output (MT-3)
Receiver Disc or SM-3 Speaker audio output (MT-4E)
Receiver squelch override input
Receiver Spare I/O
Receiver Priority COR output (MT-3)
Receiver A/D Mode (MT-4E)
Receiver Signal Strength Indicator
Receiver balanced audio output, side 2
Receiver balanced audio output, side 1
Receiver mute input
Circuit common

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN520 SR-39-3 Multiple Receiver Subrack

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN520 Rev 3-1-0

Mar 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN530 SR-39-4 Multiple Transmitter Subrack
The SR-39-4 subrack is designed to hold and interconnect the MT-3 and MT-4 series of transmitters on one universal
motherboard. The SR-39-4 subrack holds up to five transmitter modules as shown in Figure 1. The SR-39-4 has a
built in voltage regulator mounted behind the blank panel on the right side of the subrack.
The multiple transmitter subrack is ideal for multi-channel trunking systems with the mutliple receiver subrack.
TRANSMITTER
A

TRANSMITTER
B

TRANSMITTER
C

TRANSMITTER
D

TRANSMITTER
E

BLANK
PANEL

Figure 1: Multiple Transmitter Subrack

The multiple transmitter subrack does not interconnect the different transmitters but brings control lines and audio
out to connection points on the rear of the subrack. The external control connectors allow access to the following
signals on each transmitter:
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Name
TX CSEL 3
TX CSEL 2
TX CSEL 1
TX CSEL 0
TX MIC OUT
TX STANDBY

7
8
9
10
11

TX PTT
TX BAL I/P 1
TX BAL I/P 2
TX SQL FLAT I/P
TX SQL DE-EMP

12
13

TX SUBT I/P 1
TX SUBT I/P 2

14
15

TX PTT OUT
TX DIR MOD

GND

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN530 Rev 4-1-0

Function
Transmitter channel select line No. 3
Transmitter channel select line No. 2
Transmitter channel select line No. 1
Transmitter channel select line No. 0
Transmitter microphone output
Transmitter Standby (MT-3)
Transmitter Bank A / B Select input (MT-4E)
Transmitter Push To Talk input
Transmitter balanced audio input, side 1
Transmitter balanced audio input, side 2
Transmitter Squelch flat audio input (MT-3 Only)
Transmitter Squelch De-emphasis input (MT-3)
Transmitter SM-3 Speaker audio input (MT-4E)
Transmitter Subtone input 1
Transmitter Subtone input 2 (MT-3)
Transmitter Secure / Clear input (MT-4E)
Transmitter Push To Talk output
Transmitter Direct Modulation input (MT-3)
Transmitter A / D Mode Control input (MT-4E)
Circuit common

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN530 SR-39-4 Multiple Transmitter Subrack

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN530 Rev 4-1-0

Mar 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN600 AC-3E Audio Control Card
The AC-3E audio control card is a plug-in module which provides audio routing, PTT routing, and muting control for
MT-3 and MT-4 radio systems. The audio control card includes the following features:
• jumper selectable audio routing, PTT, and muting.
• two independently adjustable hang timers adjustable from 50 milliseconds to 10 seconds.
• sockets for optional CTCSS decoders and encoders.
• low power analog and CMOS control circuitry.
• maximum standby current of 30 mA.
• true balanced 600  inputs and outputs for external equipment connection.
• optically isolated inputs and outputs for control by external equipment.
• suitable for Type 2 E&M signalling.
FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MICMODE

FREQUENCY (MHz)

RECEIVER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

SQ . DI SA B L E

TX
SQ. DISABLE

N O RM
OFF

FUNCTION

3
4

5
7

CNTL
BUS

USB

RF I N

RX B

MIC

TX B13

RF OUT

RF IN

REFERENCE

INPUT

CNTL
BUS

POWER
ON

METER
-

MIC
5

TX A

VOL

REF
IN

SYSTEM REGULATOR
12

NORM
OFF
KEY TX

NORM
OFF

USB

RX A
7

TRANSMITTER

A D

TX A

TX B

RECEIVER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

TRANSMITTER

AUDIO
CONTROL

OFF

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

SPKR

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE
MADE IN CANADA

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

The AC-3E audio control card is fully configurable and can be used for all repeater and base station applications.
The audio control card module circuitry consists of three main functional blocks:
AUDIO
CONTROL

(1) The repeater control circuit, which allows all COR / PTT routing combinations for all repeaters.
(2) Optional CTCSS modules that can be installed at the factory or in the field.

TX A
RX A
TX B

TX A
9

RX B
TX B13

(3) Audio routing circuitry for active level control and distribution of receiver to transmitter audio
signals. The AC-3E is designed for applications where interface to external equipment is required.
All audio and control inputs/outputs are isolated by transformers and opto-isolators on the AC-3E.

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE

600 , -25 dBm to 0 dBm adjustable
600 , -20 dBm to +3 dBm adjustable
4.7 K, -25 dBm to +3 dBm adjustable

External Audio Input:
External Audio Output:
Internal Audio Input:

The AC-3E audio control card includes four potentiometers on the front panel for adjusting internal audio levels.
Optional frequency select rotary switches can also be mounted on the front panel of the audio control cards, giving
easy access to 16 pre-programmed receiver and transmitter operating frequencies. Two switches are mounted on
the front of the audio control cards that can be configured to control CTCSS on / off or repeat disable. Configuration
of all switches on the audio control card is set up at the factory at the time of order.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN600 Rev 6-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

May 14

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN600 AC-3E Audio Control Card
Although the Audio Control Card can be configured to work in various configurations with add-in options and
functionality, the three main functions of the AC-3E Audio Control Card are shown in Figures 1, 2 and 3:
CORA -> PTTA
JUMPER

PTTA
INHIBIT

CORA
INHIBIT

OPTIONAL
CTCSS
ENCODER

TXA
PTT

RXA
COR

TXA
SUBTONE
I/P

CORA -> PTTB
JUMPER

CORB -> PTTA
JUMPER
CORB
INHIBIT
RXB
COR

CORB -> PTTB
JUMPER

RXA
DISCRIMINATOR
O/P

REPEATER
INTER
CONNECTIONS

RXA
BALANCED
O/P

CTCSS
DECODER

RXA
MUTE

Jumper
Selection

TO AUDIO ROUTING

PTTB
INHIBIT
TXB
PTT

HANG
TIMER
A

OPTIONAL
CTCSS
ENCODER

OPTO
ISOLATORS

HANG
TIMER
B

AUX1
COR

RXB
DISCRIMINATOR
O/P

AUX2
COR

RXB
BALANCED
O/P

AUX1
PTT

TXB
SUBTONE
I/P

CTCSS
DECODER

RXB
MUTE

Jumper
Selection

TO AUDIO ROUTING

AUX2
PTT

AUXILIARY CONNECTIONS

Figure 1: Repeater Control

Figure 2: CTCSS Control
AUDIO
GATE

AUDIO
LEVEL
CONTROL
C19
AUX1 BALANCED
I/P

R120

RECEIVER A

AUDIO
GATES

C20

AUDIO
LEVEL
CONTROLS
TXA AUDIO

TXA BALANCED
I/P

R5
DISTRIBUTION
AMPLIFIER
TXB AUDIO

RXA BALANCED O/P
FROM CTCSS CONTROL

TXB BALANCED
I/P

AUXILIARY AUDIO

B11
AUX1 BALANCED
O/P

R13
LINE
DRIVER
AMPLIFIERS

AUDIO
GATE

RECEIVER B

A11

AUDIO
LEVEL
CONTROL

R48

B14

DISTRIBUTION
AMPLIFIER

AUX2 BALANCED
I/P

R123

RXB BALANCED O/P
FROM CTCSS CONTROL

A14
R52

AUXILIARY AUDIO

C1
AUX2 BALANCED
O/P

R56
LINE
DRIVER
AMPLIFIERS

Figure 3: Audio Routing

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN600 Rev 6-0-0

May 14

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN640 CI-PM-3 Paging Modulator
The Paging Modulator is a plug-in module which provides digital and/or analog paging capability, such as base
station paging, remote paging or simulcast paging, for MT-3 and MT-4 radio systems. The CI-PM-3 is configured
via the front panel switches and internal jumper settings.
The CI-PM-3 paging modulator supports both analog and digital paging formats, and can transmit POCSAG and
other 2-level modulation schemes at transfer rates of 512, 1200 and 2400 baud. It can also be configured for use
as a data repeater, whereby 2-level paging data is recovered, re-shaped and then re-transmitted to an additional
repeater/paging transmitter.
The CI-PM-3 supports 4-level modulation formats at data transfer rates up to 6400 bps. Each of the four modulation
deviation levels can be independently set, making the CI-PM-3 suitable for use in such pager signaling schemes as
Motorola’s FLEX™ paging protocol.

DATA
MODE
A

REF IN

REF
IN

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

REF OUT

MICMODE

FREQ
REF

3
4

NORM
OFF

5
7

REF
IN

SQ. DISABLE

USB

FUNCTION

A D

DATA / CTRL
PORT

SYSTEM REGULATOR

FREQUENCY (MHz)

DATA

EXT

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

PAGING
MODULATOR

VOL

INT
NORM

CNTL
BUS

MODE
SETUP
2 LEVEL

USB
MIC

4 LEVEL

RF OUT
CNTL
BUS

SET

OFF

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

RF I N

SET
MOD

POWER
ON

METER

DEV

SPKR

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE
MADE IN CANADA

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

The CI-PM-3 uses an on-board frequency reference source consisting of a 10 MHz OCXO, with a frequency stability
of ± 0.35 ppm from -30°C to +60°C. For high stability applications (such as Simulcast), the CI-PM-3 paging modulator
may be configured to use an external high stability reference source (i.e., rubidium, GPS or WWV) with a standard
stability greater than or equal to 0.002 ppm, to discipline the on-board phase-locked loop OCXO oscillator.

PAGING
MODULATOR

DATA
MODE
A

REF IN

D
REF OUT

DATA

EXT

FREQ
REF

The CI-PM-3 Paging Modulator includes the following standard features:

DATA / CTRL
PORT

INT
NORM

MODE
SETUP
2 LEVEL
SET
MOD
4 LEVEL
SET
DEV

• low power analog and CMOS control circuitry (current draw of less than 250 mA).
• extended operating temperature range.
• jumper selectable repeater/paging transmitter configuration.
• on-board 10 MHz OCXO.
• front panel selection of PLL OCXO using external high stability frequency reference.
• jumper and line selectable analog/digital paging configuration.
• connection for optional CTCSS encoder/decoder.
• balanced 600 / single-ended microphone input.
• selectable digital delay for simulcast operation.

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE

FLEX™ is a trademark of Motorola, Inc.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN640 Rev 2-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN640 CI-PM-3 Paging Modulator
Installation:
Figure 1 shows a generic connection between the Codan subrack with A-PNL-AUX96-3 auxiliary connector to the
Zetron Model 66 for analog and/or digital 2 level paging.
P1 (A-PNL-AUX96-3 CONTROL CONNECTOR)
CODAN RADIO EQUIPMENT

ZETRON MODEL 66
TRANSMITTER CONTROLLER
TRANSMITTER

(GPIO 15) BAL AUDIO I/P1
(GPIO 13) BAL AUDIO I/P2
(GPIO 9) PTT I/P

CD15 (J3-15)

CD11 (J3-13)

CD6 (J3-9)

4
7

(GPIO 2) CTCSS HU/BUSY
(GPIO 16) 2-LVL DATA
(GPIO 10) A/D MODE SEL
GND

13.8V
GND

CD20 (J3-2)

CD17 (J3-16)

CD7 (J3-10)

AZ32 (J4-2)

B2 (J4-5)

B32 (J4-1)

TO TX LO
TO TX HI
ANA PTT N/O
DIG PTT N/O
CTCSS CONTROL
DIG DATA
DIG MODE
GND

LINK
+12 VDC
GND

GND

4
PURC TONES FROM
MODEL 2200, ETC.

LINK LO
LINK HI

Jumpers Required on Model 66:
Pins 5, 8 and 12 to GND
JP2 = B

Figure 1: CI-PM-3 Connection Diagram

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN640 Rev 2-1-0

Mar 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN650 CI-RC-4L Repeater Control Card
The CI-RC-4L repeater control card is a plug-in module which provides LVDS Serial Data routing, COR-PTT routing,
and receiver priority settings for an MT-4 repeater radio system. The repeater control card includes the following
features:
• jumper selectable LVDS Serial Data and COR-PTT routing (repeater configuration).
• receiver priority setting jumpers for certain configurations (where required).
• jumpers for disabling LVDS Serial Data and COR-PTT routing on simplex links.
• optional CTCSS interface board for 1 of 10 CTCSS tone decode selection (used for custom systems only).
The MT-4 receiver and transmitter modules all plug into the CI-RC-4L repeater controller via cables that plug in to
the RJ45 jacks on the front panel of all the modules. The CI-RC-4L comes with four different cable lengths to plug
into the four repeater receiver and repeater transmitter modules. If the system only uses two of the cables, the other
cables can be kept for future system expansion or as spare cables.

SWITCH A
15

SWITCH B
15

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

13
11

A D

MICMODE

FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

A D

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

REPEATER
CONTROL

MICMODE

SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF

SYSTEM REGULATOR
FUNCTION

5
7

TX A
REF
IN

USB

REF
IN

USB

VOL

RX A
CNTL
BUS

CNTL
BUS

USB

TX B

USB

RF I N
MIC

RF OUT

RF I N
MIC

CNTL
BUS

RX B

RF OUT
CNTL
BUS

POWER
ON

METER
OFF

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT
SPKR

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE
MADE IN CANADA

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

Optional frequency select rotary switches can also be mounted on the front panel of the repeater control card, giving
easy access to 16 pre-programmed receiver and transmitter operating frequencies. The CI-RC-4L has no external
audio or serial data and is used only for controlling repeater configurations. The repeater control card module
circuitry consists of three main jumper functions:
REPEATER
CONTROL
SWITCH A
15

SWITCH B

3
5

13
11

(1) Repeater Configuration jumpers used to determine which receiver keys and routes data to which
transmitter.

(2) Receiver priority settings used to set receiver priority for certain repeater configurations.

TX A

RX A

(3) Additional jumpers for the CTCSS interface board and other miscellaneous functions.

TX B

RX B

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN650 Rev 5-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN650 CI-RC-4L Repeater Control Card
Repeater Configuration Jumpers
Repeater Configuration

Keying

JU1

JU2

JU3

Repeater in A side of subrack

RXA -> TXA

Out

Repeater in B side of subrack

RXB -> TXB

Out

Two independant repeaters
in each side of subrack

RXA -> TXA
RXB -> TXB

Out

* Drop-Link on A side
(Repeater in the A side with a
link on the B side)

RXA -> TXA
RXA -> TXB
RXB -> TXA

Out

* Drop-Link on B side
(Repeater in the B side with a
link on the A side)

RXA -> TXB
RXB -> TXA
RXB -> TXB

Out

Crossband System

RXA -> TXB
RXB -> TXA

Out

Crossband System with Simplex
frequencies on A or B side
(First receiver has priority)

RXA -> TXB
RXB -> TXA

* Drop-Repeating Link
(Repeater in A or B side with
repeating link in A or B side)

RXA -> TXA
RXA -> TXB
RXB -> TXA
RXB -> TXB

Out

Receiver Priority Jumper Settings
These jumpers are only used for the Drop-Link configurations noted with an * above. For Drop-Links with Simplex
links, set the receiver priority to the local repeater receiver.
Receiver Priority

JU9

JU10

JU11

First receiver active has priority

Out

RXA priority

Out

RXB priority

Out

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN650 Rev 5-1-0

Mar 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN652 CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller
The CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller provides control capability for up to four receiver / transmitter pairs in an
MT-4E repeater radio system. The CI-RC-4M-G2 controller provides the following features:
• interconnection (LVDS Serial Data routing, COR-PTT routing, Audio routing) of up to four receiver and four
transmitter modules in any configuration (repeater, repeater with links, crossband systems, etc.).
• four-way analog audio bridge allowing analog to digital and digital to analog conversions with up to four pairs of
radios (with adjustable audio levels).
• multiple CTCSS tones and NAC codes may be selected to operate each connection between receivers and
transmitters (up to seven CTCSS/NAC for each link).
• DTMF control of receiver to transmitter links.
• setting of receiver priorities.
• transmitter channel switching based on received CTCSS or NAC.
• auxiliary E&M connection.
• acknowledge tones for each transmitter on DTMF disable / enable.
• custom jumperable Repeat Disable line for controlling analog bridging (links) and E&M connections.
• current draw of 8 mA to 72 mA dependant on system configuration (17 mA to 27 mA without audio bridging).
• 2 independent general purpose outputs that can be controlled by NAC, CTCSS or DTMF
(open collector 750 mA / 30 Vdc max).
The MT-4E receiver and transmitter modules all plug into the CI-RC-4M-G2 repeater controller via cables that
plug into the RJ45 jacks on the front panel of all the modules. The CI-RC-4M-G2 comes with eight different cable
lengths to plug into the eight repeater receiver and repeater transmitter modules. If the system only uses some of
the cables, the other cables can be kept for future system expansion or as spare cables. The CI-RC-4M-G2 is 19”
rack mountable in 1 RU of rack space.
MULTIPLE LINK CONTROLLER - G2

RX & TX INTERCONNECT PORTS
USB
TXA

RXA

TXB

RXB

TXC

RXC

TXD

RXD

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

FREQUENCY (MHz)

SYSTEM REGULATOR
FUNCTION

12
11

REF
IN

A D

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MICMODE

REF
IN

A D

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF

MICMODE

REF
IN

USB

SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF
REF
IN

USB

1
2
3

10
9

5
7

VOL

POWER
ON

+
METER

OFF

CNTL
BUS

USB

RF I N
MIC

RF I N

RF OUT

MIC

RF OUT

CNTL
BUS

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT
SPKR

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

A D

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MICMODE

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MICMODE

REF
IN

MADE IN CANADA

SYSTEM REGULATOR

A D

SQ. DISABLE

USB

MODEL # CODE

RECEIVER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

NORM
OFF

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

TRANSMITTER

FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF
REF
IN

USB

FUNCTION

5
7

VOL

CNTL
BUS

USB

RF I N
MIC

RF OUT

RF I N
MIC

CNTL
BUS

RF OUT
CNTL
BUS

POWER
ON

METER
OFF

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT
SPKR

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN652 Rev 2-0-0

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

MADE IN CANADA

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 10

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN652 CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller
Installation:
In addition to the RJ45 interconnect cables on the front panel, the +9.5 Vdc power and ground must be connected
on the back panel. Figure 1 shows a diagram of the back panel of the CI-RC-4M-G2.
9.5VDC INPUT

CI-RC-4M-G2
AUX-E&M CONNECTIONS

SUBRACK-1 A & B

SUBRACK-2 C & D

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 1:CI-RC-4M-G2 Back Panel

A female DB25 connector on the back of the subrack (J12) can be used for connectioning to the CI-RC-4M-G2
using a standard straight-through male-to-male DB25 cable. The A-PNL-AUX96-3 auxiliary connector can also be
used to connect to the CI-RC-4M-G2, as shown in Figure 2. The information in brackets is the function that uses
that particular connection. For example, if you are using CTCSS tones, the Rx Disc O/P must be connected. The
diagram only shows connections for Receiver and Transmitter A.
CI-RC-4M-G2 MULTIPLE
LINK CONTROLLER

CODAN RADIO EQUIPMENT
J9 +

+9.5 Vdc

J9 -

GND

B10 (J1-8)

RXA Disc O/P

RXA Disc O/P (CTCSS)

B24 (J1-5)

RXA BAL O/P1

RXA Bal Audio 1 (DTMF and E&M)

A24 (J1-6)

RXA BAL O/P 2

C21 (J2-1)

TXA CSEL D0

TXA CSEL0 (Channel Selection)

B21 (J2-2)

TXA CSEL D1

TXA CSEL1 (Channel Selection)

A21 (J2-3)

TXA CSEL D2

TXA CSEL2 (Channel Selection)

C23 (J2-4)

TXA CSEL D3

TXA CSEL3 (Channel Selection)

B9 (J6-1)

BANK A/B

TXA BANK A/B (BankSelection)

A32 (J4-1)

GND

C18 (J1-1)

TXA BAL I/P 1

TXA Bal Audio 1 (E&M)

B18 (J1-2)

TXA BAL I/P 2

BB6 (J1-3)

TXA PTT

TXA PTT (E&M)
ACK PTT (Ack Tone)
RXA Mute (Simplex Operating Mode)

RXA Mute

A, B, C and D

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Aux Bal Out 2

E&M CONNECTIONS

AUX - E&M CONNECTIONS

TX
B
CO ank
R
A
Rp Inp /B
t
u
Gr _Dis t
o
(
RX und A on
ly)
RX Disc
O
Ac Bal A ut
k
u
RX PTT dio
1
Mu
te

Back Panel Pin-Out

Aux Bal Out 1

Aux Bal In 1
Aux Bal In 2
Aux COR E
Aux COR C

O/P udio
GP al A
B
TX TT Out
P
TX PTT
x
3
Au el
Cs 2
TX sel
C 1
TX sel
C 0
TX sel
C
TX

C
OR
xC RE
Au CO 1
In
x
Au Bal ut 1
O
x
Au Bal ut 2
O
x
Au al 2
x B In
Au Bal
A
x
Au PTT K
x
Au PTT
x
Au

Aux PTT A
Aux PTT K

Figure 2: CI-RC-4M-G2 Connection Diagram

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 10

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN652 Rev 2-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN652 CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller
Multiple Link Controller Programming:
The CI-RC-4M-G2 multiple link controller is software programmable using the MLCS (Multiple Link Controller
Software). The MLCS allows flexible programming options for the radio system. A type A to 5 pin mini-type B USB
cable is used to connect the USB port of the computer to the USB port on the front panel of the controller. The
System Settings and Receiver / Transmitter Links windows are shown in Figure 3.

Figure 3: Sysytem Settings and Receiver / Transmitter Links

The Receiver / Transmitter Links window allows for a wide variety of complex repeater configurations using a link
configuration grid. The grid uses color coding to indicate different connection settings.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN652 Rev 2-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 10

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN652 CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller
Each link on the grid can be programmed separately for a different configuration. Three different link configurations
are shown in Figure 4: COR Controlled Link, DTMF Controlled Link and a Conditional Link (with both CTCSS and
NAC conditions, as well as Channel Selection capability).

Figure 4: Link Configurations

Figure 5 shows the CTCSS selection window (CTCSS tones need to selected globally for the CI-RC-4M-G2),
Channel Selection window and General Purpose Output window.

Figure 5: CTCSS Tones, Channel Select and General Purpose Outputs

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 10

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN652 Rev 2-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN652 CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller
Analog Audio Bridging Circuit:
The CI-RC-4M-G2 controller is equipped with a 4 way analog audio bridge. This audio bridge allows the user to
interconnect RF modules using an analog audio interface similar to the AC-3E and BC-4E products. It allows the
user to interconnect up to four RF modules modules as well as an auxiliary audio input and output.
On the multi-link controller there is an audio adjustment pot for each audio path available. The block diagram on the
next page (see Figure 6) shows the audio routing and audio pot adjustments.
To enable a specific audio path, the appropriate audio jumper must be removed. For the specific audio jumper
required for enabling the appropriate audio path, refer to the jumper table below:
JU53
JU59
JU54
JU58
JU52
JU57
JU51
JU56
JU55
JU50
JU62
JU67

RXA to TXA Audio Disable
RXA to TXB Audio Disable
RXA to TXC Audio Disable
RXA to TXD Audio Disable
RXB to TXA Audio Disable
RXB to TXB Audio Disable
RXB to TXC Audio Disable
RXB to TXD Audio Disable
RXA to Aux Audio O/P Disable
RXB to Aux Audio O/P Disable
RXC to Aux Audio O/P Disable
RXD to Aux Audio O/P Disable

JU63
JU70
JU64
JU68
JU65
JU71
JU66
JU69

RXC to TXA Audio Disable
RXC to TXB Audio Disable
RXC to TXC Audio Disable
RXC to TXD Audio Disable
RXD to TXA Audio Disable
RXD to TXB Audio Disable
RXD to TXC Audio Disable
RXD to TXD Audio Disable

To enable COR-PTT routing of the signla, the following jumpers must be installed:
JU23A
JU23B
JU23C
JU23D
JU24A
JU24B
JU24C
JU24D

COR A to PTT A Enable
COR B to PTT A Enable
COR C to PTT A Enable
COR D to PTT A Enable
COR A to PTT B Enable
COR B to PTT B Enable
COR C to PTT B Enable
COR D to PTT B Enable

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN652 Rev 2-0-0

JU25A
JU25B
JU25C
JU25D
JU26A
JU26B
JU26C
JU26D

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

COR A to PTT C Enable
COR B to PTT C Enable
COR C to PTT C Enable
COR D to PTT C Enable
COR A to PTT D Enable
COR B to PTT D Enable
COR C to PTT D Enable
COR D to PTT D Enable

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 5 of 10

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 6 of 10

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

RXB
AUDIO
O/P

RECEIVER B

RXA AUDIO O/P

RECEIVER A
DISTRIBUTION
AMPLIFIER

RV3

RV9

RV4

RV10

RV5

TO AUX

TO TXD

TO TXC

TO TXB

TO TXA

RXC
AUDIO
O/P

RV6

RV11

RV7

RV12

RV8

AUDIO
LEVEL
CONTROLS

RECEIVER C

AUDIO
GATES

TN652 Rev 2-0-0

RV14

RV20

RV16

RV22

RV18

TO AUX

TO TXD

TO TXC

TO TXB

TO TXA

SUMMING
AMPLIFIERS

AUDIO
GATE

RXD
AUDIO
O/P

RECEIVER D

LINE
DRIVER
AMPLIFIERS

AUXILIARY AUDIO

TXD AUDIO

TXC AUDIO

TXB AUDIO

TXA AUDIO

RV13

AUDIO
LEVEL
CONTROL

RV15

RV21

RV17

RV23

RV19

TO AUX

TO TXD

TO TXC

TO TXB

TO TXA

AUX AUDIO O/P

TXD AUDIO I/P

TXC AUDIO I/P

TXB AUDIO I/P

TXA AUDIO I/P

AUX AUDIO I/P

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems

TN652 CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller

Figure 6: Audio Routing and Audio Pot adjustments

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Aug 16

FROM RXB
FROM RXC
FROM RXD

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN652 Rev 2-0-0

Aug 16

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

ANALOG TONE REMOTE

ANALOG LINK

(LEASED TELEPHONE LINES)

G/F

USB

REF
IN

USB

RF INPUT

RF OUTPUT

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

RF I N

CNTL
BUS

USB

MICMODE

MADE IN CANADA

MIC

RF OUT

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MODEL # CODE

A D

REF
IN

CNTL
BUS

HANDSET

POWER

PTT

MONITOR

FUNCTION

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

RF I N

MADE IN CANADA

CNTL
BUS

MODEL # CODE

RF OUT

USB

REF
IN

NORM
OFF

SQ. DISABLE

RECEIVER

A D

FREQUENCY (MHz)

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

FREQUENCY (MHz)

MIC

RF I N

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

REF
IN

PROGRAMMING PORT

DSP-223

2
3

SPKR

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

VOL
TX A

RX A

ANTENNA A

MADE IN CANADA

METER

5
6

8
7

SYSTEM REGULATOR
FUNCTION

VSWR

G/F

The UHF Transmitter (TXB) Transmits

ANALOG LINK

DANIELS

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

ELECTRONICS LTD.

FREQUENCY (MHz)

POWER AMPLIFIER

PWR CTRL

RF INPUT

RF OUTPUT

SPKR

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

MADE IN CANADA

TX A

RX A

ANTENNA A

TXA Mutes RXA + Add Simplex Unmute Delay (250ms) to TX

UHF RX = TBD MHz / CTCSS TBD Hz

METER

VOL

SYSTEM REGULATOR

8
7

FUNCTION

REMOTE ADAPTER

and other UHF stations.

to the UHF Base Station Receiver

the received VHF and UHF signals back

TELEX DSP-223 TONE

UHF RXC = TBD MHz / CSQ

TRANSMITTER

A D

USB

MICMODE

CNTL
BUS

USB

NORM
OFF

SQ. DISABLE

FREQUENCY (MHz)

A D

MULTIPLE LINK CONTROLLER - G2

RECEIVER

UHF TXC = TBD MHz / CTCSS TBD Hz

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

NORM
OFF

SQ. DISABLE

ANALOG AUDIO INTERFACE

PTT IC

CNTL
BUS

USB

A D

POWER AMPLIFIER

RF OUT

PWR CTRL

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

MIC

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

FREQUENCY (MHz)

RXD

FREQUENCY (MHz)

TXD

FREQUENCY (MHz)

A D

VSWR

CNTL
BUS

MICMODE

REF
IN

RXC
TRANSMITTER

TXC
RECEIVER

RXB

TRANSMITTER

TXB

RX & TX INTERCONNECT PORTS

RXA

+
RX
TX
S
+
RX
TX
O
O
E
ND TX O TX S RX TX O TX O RX E
DI
DI
CS
E
OU E
RA
CT
LIN
LIN
RA
DI CS E
DI DI
LIN RA CT LIN LIN RA RA

TELEX

TXA

VHF RXB = TBD MHz / CTCSS TBD Hz

UHF TX = TBD MHz / Selectable CTCSS

UHF Receiver at the High Site.

different CTCSS tones to the

The UHF Transmitter will transmit

Station Transmitter in Analog Mode.

The DSP-223 keys up the UHF Base

ANALOG 2 OR 4 WIRE AUDIO AND TONES

based on CTCSS.

VHF Transmitter (TXA) channels

programmed to change

The Multiple Link Controller is

TXA mutes RXA with Simplex Unmute Delay.

UHF Transmitter (TXB) to repeat the signal.

The UHF Receiver (RXB) also keys up the

frequency, but with different CTCSS tones.

repeaters all on the same receive

This VHF transmitter goes out to different

channel with the same CTCSS tone.

VHF Transmitter (TXA) to a corresponding

and changes the channel of the

one of multiple different CTCSS tones

The UHF Receiver (RXB) Receives

VHF TXB = TBD MHz / CTCSS TBD Hz

VHF RXA = TBDMHz / CTCSS TBD Hz

VHF TXA = TBD MHz / Selectable CTCSS

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems

TN652 CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller

Figure 7: Example Multiple Link Controller System with analog links

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 7 of 10

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

CONSOLE

TELEX IP BASED

or NAC (for a digital link).

or Air Detect (RXD)

LAN / WAN

TN652 Rev 2-0-0

Clear

Secure

BNK

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE

Disable

Enable

Local

TX B

TX A

RX A

RADIO 2

+ X
TX TX TX R

HANDSET

TXA

USB

CNTL
BUS

REF
IN

CNTL
BUS

USB

LNK

IP-223
LINE

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

CNTL
BUS

MADE IN CANADA

RF OUT

2
3

MADE IN CANADA

TX A

RX A

ANTENNA A

2
3

SPKR

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

MADE IN CANADA

METER

4
6

VOL

9
7

FUNCTION

OFF

POWER
ON

SYSTEM REGULATOR

METER

SPKR

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

VOL

5
6

8
7

SYSTEM REGULATOR
FUNCTION

TX B

RX B

ANTENNA B

SPKR

TX A

RX A

ANTENNA A

MADE IN CANADA

METER

SYSTEM REGULATOR

FUNCTION

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

VOL

IP REMOTE ADAPTER

TELEX IP-223 OR IP-224

ANALOG LINK

has High Priority.

The Air Guard Receiver (RXC)

UHF Base Station Receiver.

the received VHF signals back to the

The UHF Transmitter (TXB) Transmits

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

CNTL
BUS

RF I N

REF
IN

USB

NORM
OFF

RF I N

SQ. DISABLE

A D

RECEIVER

A D

FREQUENCY (MHz)

RF INPUT

RF OUTPUT

MODEL # CODE

RECEIVER

MADE IN CANADA

RF I N

MADE IN CANADA

REF
IN

FREQUENCY (MHz)

MODEL # CODE

RF I N

MODEL # CODE

MIC

USB

REF
IN

NORM
OFF

FREQUENCY (MHz)

MADE IN CANADA

SQ. DISABLE

RECEIVER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

A D

FREQUENCY (MHz)

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

TRANSMITTER

A D

USB

MICMODE

CNTL
BUS

USB

NORM
OFF

SQ. DISABLE

MULTIPLE LINK CONTROLLER - G2

RECEIVER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

A D

POWER AMPLIFIER

RF OUT

PWR CTRL

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

MIC

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MODEL # CODE

G/F
VSWR

USB

G/F

RF INPUT

RF OUTPUT

CNTL
BUS

MICMODE

A D

VSWR

PWR CTRL

FREQUENCY (MHz)

MADE IN CANADA

RF I N

MODEL # CODE

REF
IN

NORM
OFF

SQ. DISABLE

MADE IN CANADA

POWER AMPLIFIER

RF OUT

A D

MODEL # CODE

MIC

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

USB

A D

FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

USB

FREQUENCY (MHz)

RXD

FREQUENCY (MHz)

TXD

CNTL
BUS

MICMODE

REF
IN

RXC
TRANSMITTER

TXC
RECEIVER

RXB

TRANSMITTER

TXB

RX & TX INTERCONNECT PORTS

RXA

ANALOG AUDIO INTERFACE
P25 BASE
CONTROL

Zeroize
Key

TX A

RADIO 1

+ X
TX TX TX R

TELEX

at the High Site.

three different NACs to the UHF Receiver

The UHF Transmitter can transmit

Transmitter in Digital Mode.

The IP-223 keys up the UHF Base Station

P25 DIGITAL LINK

Flight Following or Air Detect.

VHF Transmitter (TXA) to Air Guard,

and changes the channel of the

one of three separate NACs

The UHF Receiver (RXB) Receives

on the UHF Transmitter (TXB).

and Transmit the Received signal

TELEX PROPRIETARY DIGITAL IP INTERFACE

based on CTCSS (for an analog link)

programmed to change channels

The Multiple Link Controller can be

INTERFACE

COMMON AIR

Air Guard (RXC),

on Flight Following (RXA),

Three VHF Receivers receive

audio input of the VHF Transmitter (TXA).

signal and outputs audio that is routed to the

The UHF Receiver (RXB) de-vocodes the P25 Digital

order to allow the P25 Digital to Analog conversion.

also through the audio routing circuitry in

GND

Page 8 of 10
LVDS serial data for the NAC detect and

The UHF Receiver (RXB) needs to connected via

VHF TXA Ch. 3 = 168.750 MHz / CTCSS TBD = Air Detect

VHF TXA Ch. 2 = 168.625 MHz / CTCSS 110.9 Hz = Air Guard

VHF TXA Ch. 1 = 168.650 MHz / CTCSS 110.9 Hz = Flight Following

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems

TN652 CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller

Figure 8: Example Multiple Link Controller System with P25 Digital uplink

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Aug 16

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN652 Rev 2-0-0

Aug 16

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004
Big Butte
Taylor
Sedgewick
Kelly
Malad
Rockland

F3 = 1750 Hz

F4 = 1650 Hz

F5 = 1550 Hz

F6 = 1450 Hz

F7 = 1350 Hz

F8 = 1250 Hz

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

F11 = 950 Hz

F12 = 850 Hz

CONSOLE

ANALOG TONE REMOTE

based on CTCSS.

programmed to change channels

The Multiple Link Controller is

Fire Rptr.

F10 = 1050 Hz

Direct

Garns

F2 = 1850 Hz

F9 = 1150 Hz

Kinport

F1 = 1950 Hz

(LEASED TELEPHONE LINES)

ANALOG 2 OR 4 WIRE AUDIO AND TONES

PTT IC

CNTL
BUS

REF
IN

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

RF I N

MADE IN CANADA

CNTL
BUS

USB

MODEL # CODE

RF OUT

REF
IN

NORM
OFF

VSWR

G/F

MADE IN CANADA

SQ. DISABLE

REF
IN

PTT

MONITOR

FUNCTION

CNTL
BUS

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

CNTL
BUS

MADE IN CANADA

RF OUT

RF I N

MODEL # CODE

MIC

USB

REF
IN

NORM
OFF

SQ. DISABLE

RECEIVER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

A D

FREQUENCY (MHz)

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

DANIELS

ELECTRONICS LTD.

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

RF INPUT

RF OUTPUT

RF INPUT

RF OUTPUT

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

RF I N

VOL

MADE IN CANADA

TX A

SPKR

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

VOL

DANIELS

MADE IN CANADA

OFF

POWER
ON

ELECTRONICS LTD.

METER

5
6

8
7

FUNCTION

SYSTEM REGULATOR

METER

SPKR

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

RX A

ANTENNA A

TX B

RX B

ANTENNA B

DSP-223
PROGRAMMING PORT

VSWR

G/F

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

DANIELS

ELECTRONICS LTD.

FREQUENCY (MHz)

POWER AMPLIFIER

PWR CTRL

RF INPUT

RF OUTPUT

SPKR

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

MADE IN CANADA

TX A

RX A

ANTENNA A

TXA Mutes RXA + Add Simplex Unmute Delay (250ms) to TX

UHF RX = 408.475 MHz / CTCSS 103.5 Hz

METER

VOL

SYSTEM REGULATOR

8
7

FUNCTION

REMOTE ADAPTER

TELEX DSP-223 TONE

ANALOG LINK

and other UHF stations.

to the UHF Base Station Receiver

the received VHF and UHF signals back

The UHF Transmitter (TXC) Transmits

UHF RXC = 417.475 MHz / CSQ

TRANSMITTER

A D

USB

MICMODE

PWR CTRL

FREQUENCY (MHz)

POWER AMPLIFIER

MODEL # CODE

A D

RECEIVER

MADE IN CANADA

FREQUENCY (MHz)

MIC

FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

SYSTEM REGULATOR

8
7

FUNCTION

UHF TXC = 408.475 MHz / CTCSS 103.5 Hz

POWER

CNTL
BUS

USB

CNTL
BUS

USB

NORM
OFF

SQ. DISABLE

MULTIPLE LINK CONTROLLER - G2

RECEIVER
FREQUENCY (MHz)

A D

POWER AMPLIFIER

RF OUT

PWR CTRL

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

MIC

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MODEL # CODE

FREQUENCY (MHz)

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

TRANSMITTER

A D

USB

A D

G/F

CNTL
BUS

MICMODE

VSWR

RF INPUT

RF OUTPUT

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

PWR CTRL

FREQUENCY (MHz)

MADE IN CANADA

POWER AMPLIFIER

RF OUT

RF I N

MODEL # CODE

MIC

REF
IN

NORM
OFF

SQ. DISABLE

MICMODE

HANDSET

USB

A D

G/F

USB

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

VSWR

CNTL
BUS

A D

FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

USB

TRANSMITTER

RXD

RECEIVER

TXD

ANALOG AUDIO INTERFACE

+
RX
TX
S
+
RX
TX
O
O
E
ND TX O TX S RX TX O TX O RX E
DI
DI
CS
E
OU E
RA
RA
CT
LIN
LIN
DI CS E
DI DI
LIN RA CT LIN LIN RA RA

REF
IN

MICMODE

RXC

FREQUENCY (MHz)

TXC

FREQUENCY (MHz)

RXB

TRANSMITTER

TXB

RX & TX INTERCONNECT PORTS

RXA

UHF TX = 417.475 MHz / Selectable CTCSS

TXA

VHF RXB = 169.775 MHz / CTCSS 103.5 Hz

TELEX

the UHF Receiver at the High Site.

twelve different CTCSS tones to

The UHF Transmitter will transmit

Transmitter in Analog Mode.

The DSP-223 keys up the UHF Base Station

ANALOG LINK

UHF Transmitter (TXC) to repeat the signal.

The UHF Receiver (RXC) also keys up the

VHF Transmitter (TXB) on the same CTCSS tone.

CTCSS tone 9 (103.5 Hz) or 11 (179.9 Hz) will key up

channel with the same CTCSS tone.

VHF Transmitter (TXA) to a corresponding

and changes the channel of the

one of ten separate CTCSS tones

The UHF Receiver (RXC) Receives

TXB mutes RXB with Simplex Unmute Delay.

TXA mutes RXA and RXB both with Simplex Unmute Delay.

The VHF Receiver (RXB) keys up the UHF Transmitter (TXC).

tone 9 (103.5 Hz) to act as a local repeater.

it will also key up VHF Transmitter (TXB) on CTCSS

(TXC) and when it receives CTCSS tone 11 (179.9 Hz)

The VHF Receiver (RXA) keys up the UHF Transmitter

VHF TXB = 169.775 MHz / CTCSS 103.5 Hz

VHF RXA = 163.150 MHz / CTCSS 179.9 Hz

VHF TXA = 163.150 MHz / Selectable CTCSS

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems

TN652 CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller

Figure 9: Example Multiple Link Controller System with co-located repeater

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 9 of 10

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN652 CI-RC-4M-G2 Multiple Link Controller

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 10 of 10

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN652 Rev 2-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN655 CI-BC-4E Base Control Card
The CI-BC-4E base control card is a plug-in module which provides audio routing, COR and PTT routing and front
panel control for an MT-4 base station radio system. The base control card includes the following features:
• jumper selectable audio routing, PTT, and muting.
• low power analog and CMOS control circuitry.
• true balanced 600  inputs and outputs for external equipment connection.
• optically isolated inputs and outputs for control by external equipment.
• front panel control of channel and bank select for receiver and transmitter.
• front panel selection of clear / secure (encrypted) operation and clear keys operation.
• front panel selection of local or remote control of base station functions.
• suitable for Type 2 E&M signalling.
The MT-4 receiver and transmitter modules all connect to the CI-BC-4E base control card via the back panel
motherboard. There is no front panel RJ45 connection between the MT-4 receivers, transmitters and base control
card.

RX A
5

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

BNK

MICMODE

TX A

Secure

TX B

Enable

4
5

VOL

RX A

+
METER

TX A
USB

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

RF I N
MIC

RF OUT
CNTL
BUS

Zeroize
Key

ANTENNA A

CNTL
BUS

Clear
Local

REF
IN

USB

BNK

NORM
OFF

SQ. DISABLE

A
5

FUNCTION

A D

SYSTEM REGULATOR

FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

P25 BASE
CONTROL

Disable

SPKR

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE
MADE IN CANADA

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

The CI-BC-4E base control card module circuitry consists of three main functional blocks:
P25 BASE
CONTROL
RX A
A
5

BNK

TX A
A
5

TX A

BNK

Secure

(2) Front panel interface allows for user control of transmitter and receiver functions, including
encryption operation.

TX B

Clear
Local
Enable

Zeroize
Key

(1) The repeater control circuit allows all the common COR / PTT routing combinations for dual
base-repeater systems.

Disable

(3) Audio routing circuitry is for the active level control and distribution of receiver and transmitter
audio signals. The CI-BC-4E is designed for applications where interface to external equipment is
required. All audio and control inputs/outputs are isolated by transformers and opto-isolators on
the CI-BC-4E.

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE

600 , -25 dBm to 0 dBm adjustable
600 , -20 dBm to +3 dBm adjustable
4.7 K, -25 dBm to +3 dBm adjustable

CI-BC-4E External Audio Input:
CI-BC-4E External Audio Output:
CI-BC-4E Internal Audio Input:

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN655 Rev 3-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN655 CI-BC-4E Base Control Card
The three main functions of the CI-BC-4E Base Control Card are shown in Figures 1, 2 and 3:
CORA -> PTTA
JUMPER

PTT
INHIBIT

CORA
INHIBIT

TXA
PTT

RXA
COR

CORA -> PTTB
JUMPER

FRONT PANEL RX
CHANNEL SELECT
ROTARY SWITCHES

CORB -> PTTA
JUMPER
CORB
INHIBIT
RXB
COR

RXA CSEL0

FRONT PANEL TXA
BANK SELECT SWITCH

TXA BANK A/B

RXA CSEL1

FRONT PANEL RXA
BANK SELECT SWITCH

RXA BANK A/B

RXA CSEL2

FRONT PANEL TXA
SECURE/CLEAR SWITCH

TXA SECURE/CLEAR

RXA CSEL3

FRONT PANEL TXB
SECURE/CLEAR SWITCH

TXB SECURE/CLEAR

CORB -> PTTB
JUMPER
TXB
PTT

REPEATER
INTERCONNECTIONS

FRONT PANEL TX
CHANNEL SELECT
ROTARY SWITCH

FRONT PANEL
ZEROIZE
ENCRYPTION
KEYS BUTTON

TXA CSEL0

ZEROIZE
CONTROLLER

CLEAR KEYS

TXA CSEL1

OPTO
ISOLATORS

TXA CSEL2

AUX1
COR

TXA CSEL3

AUX2
COR

FRONT PANEL
LOCAL ENABLE /
DISABLE SELECT

AUX1
PTT
AUX2
PTT

AUXILIARY CONNECTIONS

Figure 1: Repeater Control

Figure 2: Front Panel Interface

AUDIO
GATE

AUDIO
LEVEL
CONTROL
C19

AUX1 BALANCED
I/P

R120

RECEIVER A

AUDIO
GATES

C20

AUDIO
LEVEL
CONTROLS
TXA AUDIO

TXA BALANCED
I/P

R9
DISTRIBUTION
AMPLIFIER
TXB AUDIO
RXA BALANCED
O/P

TXB BALANCED
I/P

R5
AUXILIARY AUDIO
B11

R13

AUX1 BALANCED
O/P

LINE
DRIVER
AMPLIFIERS

AUDIO
GATE

RECEIVER B

A11

AUDIO
LEVEL
CONTROL

R48

B14

DISTRIBUTION
AMPLIFIER

AUX2 BALANCED
I/P

R123
A14

RXB BALANCED
O/P

R52

AUXILIARY AUDIO

R56

AUX2 BALANCED
O/P

LINE
DRIVER
AMPLIFIERS

Figure 3: Audio Routing

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN655 Rev 3-1-0

Mar 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN660 UIC-4 Universal Interface Card
The UIC-4-00 Universal Interface Card (UIC) is a plug-in module which provides an IP-based Ethernet network
connection between MT-4 radio systems and other Land Mobile Radio (LMR) subsystems.

CODAN RADIO SYSTEM WITH UIC
TRANSMITTER

UIC

RECEIVER

FREQUENCY (MHz)

SYSTEM REGULATOR
FUNCTION

12
11

ETHERNET

REF
IN

A D

A D
SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF

ANTENNA A

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MICMODE

5
7

RX A

TX A

IP NETWORK

REF
IN

USB
RX A

VOL

METER
-

ZEROIZE
KEY

CNTL
BUS

TX A
USB

TX B

RF I N
USB

MIC

RF OUT
CNTL
BUS

RX B

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT
SPKR

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE
MADE IN CANADA

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

SUBSCRIBER

CONSOLE

TIA P25 DFSI Operation
The UIC supports the DFSI as published in the P25 standard document TIA-102.BAHA. The UIC provides a fully
end-to-end digital link between consoles and subscriber units and supports analog-mode calls as well as P25
calls. The UIC transports digital P25 audio data packets (IMBE™) between the console and the transmitter and
receiver radio modules without any conversion to or from baseband audio. The UIC uses Codan LVDS serial data
to transport digital information between the UIC and the receiver and transmitter modules. This preserves a fully
end-to-end digital link, including audio encryption. Analog voice is carried via the DFSI as digitized u-law pulsecode modulation (PCM) audio data.

Console Controlled / Software Programmable Features
Some of the UIC functions (eg. call start/end, channel selection, etc.) are dynamically controlled by the console. The
console that is used in a system with the UIC may not implement or provide access to all of the functions. See the
console’s documentation for more information on which UIC features are accessible from the console.
Other UIC functions (eg. IP address programming, interface mode selection, etc.) are controlled by static
programmable configuration settings. These settings can be viewed and modified using the UIC Configuration
Software.

Part Numbers
UIC-4-00
APP-UIC-4-01
APP-UIC-4-02

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN660 Rev 2-0-0

Universal Interface Card
UIC Configuration Software (available for free on the Codan LMR website)
Firmware for DFSI Operation

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN660 UIC-4 Universal Interface Card
The UIC supports all of the following features:
• Channel and Bank control of receiver and transmitter modules (2 banks of 16 channels each).
• Detect the mode (analog or P25) of an inbound call on the receiver and report to the console.
• Receiver squelch selection (muted or unsquelched) controlled by the console.
• Monitors the states of the transmitter’s forward and reverse alarm signals and report to the console.
• Clear the encryption keys from all encryption-equipped radio modules through the UIC’s front panel Zeroize Key
push button or from the console.
• Control and monitoring of 8 digital general purpose input and output (GPIO) signals from the console. The 4 inputs
are 10 mA max., 0 to +1 Vdc low / +2 to +13.8 Vdc high. The 4 outputs are 20 mA max., 0 Vdc low / +5 Vdc high.
• Control and monitoring of 8 analog GPIOs for use with external equipment. The 4 inputs are 0 to +3.3 Vdc, 3 k
impedance. The 4 outputs are 20 mA max., 0 to +3.3 Vdc.
• Monitoring power supply voltage levels and reporting to the console.
• Programmable simplex mode operation.
• Local repeating under the control of the console, or automatically when the UIC is not connected to a console.
• Current draw of 128 mA maximum.
The DFSI also supports the following features:
• Audio Reception and Transmission using IMBE™ (P25) or u-law PCM (analog).
• Passes all received P25 data to the console (NAC, TGID, MFID, ALGID, KID, etc.).
• Full end-to-end digital encryption if supported by the console and subscribers.
• Outbound audio buffering when transmitting P25 mode calls, with a programmable buffer length (200 ms max.).
UIC

Console Systems
ETHERNET

The UIC will interface with the following P25 DFSI consoles:
Avtec Scout
TX A

Catalyst IP FSI Gateway
RX A

ZEROIZE
KEY

Moducom UltraCom IP
Bosch / Telex C-Soft (P25 version)

TX B
USB
RX B

Zetron Acom

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN660 Rev 2-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN660 UIC-4 Universal Interface Card
UIC Configuration Software
The UIC Configuration Software is used to read and to modify various static configuration settings in the UIC. The
application can be used to configure the UIC locally by connecting to it via its USB port, or remotely by connecting
via Ethernet (using either the DE-UIC or DFSI interface).

UIC MAC Address
The UIC has a factory-assigned unique Ethernet MAC address that cannot be modified. This unique address is
stored in non-volatile memory and is not affected by changes to any of the UIC’s configuration settings.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN660 Rev 2-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN660 UIC-4 Universal Interface Card
Radio Functions and General purpose Inputs / Outputs
The UIC Configuration Software can also be used to test Radio Functions and General Purpose Inputs / Outputs
when connected via Ethernet.

IMBE™ is a trademark of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN660 Rev 2-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN661 UIC-5 Universal Interface Card
The UIC-5-00 Universal Interface Card (UIC) is a plug-in module which provides an IP-based Ethernet network
connection between MT-4 radio systems and other Land Mobile Radio (LMR) subsystems.

CODAN RADIO SYSTEM WITH UIC
TRANSMITTER

UIC

RECEIVER

FREQUENCY (MHz)
ETHERNET

FREQUENCY (MHz)

SYSTEM REGULATOR
FUNCTION

12
11

REF
IN

A D

A D
SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF

ANTENNA A

2
3

NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MICMODE

5
7

RX A

TX A

IP NETWORK

REF
IN

USB
RX A

VOL

METER
-

ZEROIZE
KEY

CNTL
BUS

TX A
USB

TX B

RF I N
MIC

RF OUT
CNTL
BUS

RX B

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT
SPKR

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE
MADE IN CANADA

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

SUBSCRIBER

CONSOLE

The UIC is programmable to support the TIA P25 Digital Fixed Station Interface (DFSI) standard via its network
connection. The UIC can control and monitor radio modules installed in both the A-side (left) and B-side (right) of
the subrack. An additional firmware purchase is required for B-side operation. The UIC-5-00 Card is a generational
upgrade from the UIC-4-00, adding DFSI Packet Data as well as a number of significant performance improvements
for running P25 over non-dedicated networks that may be shared with commercial or non-related users

TIA P25 DFSI Operation
The UIC supports the DFSI as published in the P25 standard document TIA-102.BAHA-A. The UIC provides a fully
end-to-end digital link between consoles and subscriber units and supports analog-mode calls as well as P25 calls.
The UIC transports digital P25 audio data packets (IMBE™or AMBE+2™) between the console and the transmitter
and receiver radio modules without any conversion to or from baseband audio. The UIC uses Codan LVDS serial
data to transport digital information between the UIC and the receiver and transmitter modules. This preserves a
fully end-to-end digital link, including audio encryption. Analog voice is carried via the DFSI as digitized u-law pulsecode modulation (PCM) audio data.
The UIC-5 supports two different types of interfaces via its network connection:
• TIA Fixed Station Interface, Version 1 (Voice only)
• TIA Fixed Station Interface, Version 2 (Voice and/or Packet Data)

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN661 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Oct 17

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 6

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN661 UIC-5 Universal Interface Card
The UIC supports all of the following features:
• Channel and Bank control of receiver and transmitter modules (2 banks of 16 channels each).
• Detect the mode (analog or P25) of an inbound call on the receiver and report to the console.
• Receiver squelch selection (muted or unsquelched) controlled by the console.
• Clear the encryption keys from all encryption-equipped radio modules through the UIC’s front panel Zeroize Key
push button.
• Control and monitoring of 8 digital general purpose input and output (GPIO) signals from the console. The 4 inputs
are 10 mA max., 0 to +1 Vdc low / +2 to +13.8 Vdc high. The 4 outputs are 20 mA max., 0 Vdc low / +5 Vdc high.
• Control and monitoring of 8 analog GPIOs for use with external equipment. The 4 inputs are 0 to +3.3 Vdc, 3 k
impedance. The 4 outputs are 20 mA max., 0 to +3.3 Vdc. Analog I/O resolution is10 bits (3.22 mv / bit = 1 LSB).
• Programmable simplex mode operation.
• Local repeating under the control of the console, or automatically when the UIC is not connected to a console.
• Current draw of 200 mA maximum.
• Audio Reception and Transmission using IMBE™ (P25) or u-law PCM (analog).
• Passes all received P25 LCW and ESW data to the console (NAC, TGID, MFID, ALGID, KID, etc.).
• Full end-to-end digital encryption if supported by the console and subscribers.
• Outbound audio buffering when transmitting P25 mode calls, with a programmable buffer length.
• DFSI v2 supports P25 Packet Data.

Console Systems
UIC

ETHERNET

The UIC will interface with the following P25 DFSI consoles:
Avtec Scout
Catalyst IP FSI Gateway

TX A

RX A

InterTalk (Pantel)
ZEROIZE
KEY

TX B

Moducom UltraCom IP
Bosch / Telex C-Soft (P25 version)

RX B

Zetron Acom
PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE

Part Numbers
UIC-5-00
APP-UIC-5-A1
APP-UIC-5-B1
APP-UIC-5-D1

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 6

Universal Interface Card
Firmware for DFSI Operation on the A side of the Codan subrack
Firmware for DFSI Operation on the B side of the Codan subrack
DFSI v2 Packet Data Option

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN661 Rev 1-0-0

Oct 17

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN661 UIC-5 Universal Interface Card
Programming and Networking
Ethernet Port
Default IP Address
Rescue IP Address
Default Username and Password

10/100 Base-T, full / half duplex, auto-sensing
192.168.123.66
172.23.123.2
p25admin (for both)

Maximum Network Bandwidth Requirement:
• Analog PCM Voice Call
100 Kbps
• Digital P25 Voice Call
70 Kbps
Default A-side UDP Port for Control Connection
Default A-side RTP Port for Voice Conveyance Connection
Default B-side UDP Port for Control Connection
Default B-side RTP Port for Voice Conveyance Connection
Default A-side Packet Data Port
Default B-side Packet Data Port

50000
50020
50002
50022
50010
50012

UIC Web GUI Global Settings

The UIC Web GUI is used to read and to modify various static configuration settings in the UIC. The Web GUI can
be used to configure the UIC Global Settings such as the IP address.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN661 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Oct 17

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 6

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN661 UIC-5 Universal Interface Card
UIC Web GUI Configuration Parameters
The UIC Web GUI can also be used to set the indivicual configuration parameters for each of the radio pairs
connected to the UIC (Side ‘A’ and Side ‘B’).

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 6

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN661 Rev 1-0-0

Oct 17

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN661 UIC-5 Universal Interface Card
Recommended Network Requirements for P25 DFSI with Codan UIC
Following is a list of recommended network requirements for both the Codan UIC-4 and UIC-5 cards for P25
Digital Fixed Station Interface connection (in both P25 and analog mode).
These recommended values are for the Codan equipment. Other P25 DFSI equipment (consoles / base stations)
may have different network requirements.
Specification

Fixed Network

3G / LTE Network

Notes

Latency

< 20 ms

< 250 ms

Based on end user acceptable audio delay

Jitter (UIC-5)

< 8 ms

< 100 ms

*See Note below

Jitter (UIC-4)

< 4 ms

< 15 ms

Packet Loss (UIC-5)

< 3%

< 6%

Packet Loss (UIC-4)

< 0.5%

< 1%

Bandwidth

250 kbps or better (full duplex)

Better than DAQ 3.4 voice reproduction
Minimum 80kbps for P25 voice and/or 100kbps
for Analog

Note: For jitter conditions beyond the stated values (eg. satellite communications), increasing the audio buffer will
account for these situations at the cost of additional voice latency.
The UIC configuration settings for the buffer are as follows:
UIC Configuration Setting

Default Value

Range

Audio Buffer Length (UIC-4)

200 ms

40 - 500 ms

Audio Buffer Length (UIC-5)

200 ms

20 - 10000 ms

The UIC-4 is more sensitive to jitter and packet loss, the maximum specifications shown for a 3G / LTE network
may result in less than ideal performance.

IMBE™ is a trademark of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN661 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Oct 17

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 5 of 6

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN661 UIC-5 Universal Interface Card

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 6 of 6

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN661 Rev 1-0-0

Oct 17

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN670 Stratus™ Controller
The Stratus™ Controller is a general-purpose controller for routing digital P25 communications over a Wide Area
Network (WAN) or Local Area Network (LAN). The Stratus™ Controller will work in digital clear or digital secure
mode; it is fully capable of all operation with encrypted calls. The Stratus™ Controller will also route analog
communications, but only in a full broadcast mode (ie. Analog signal received at one site will automatically be
transmitted at all sites). FSI (version 2) will support more analog routing (CTCSS and DCS) and will be incorporated
into the Stratus™ Controller in the future.
The Stratus™ Controller uses the TIA-102 (P25) standard Digital Fixed Station Interface (DFSI) to link to FSI
capable devices such as the Codan Universal Interface Card (UIC). The Stratus™ Controller can support both
Fixed Station radios using the UIC, or emulate Fixed Station Radios allowing DFSI capable consoles to connect
to the Stratus™ Controller. The Stratus™ Controller supports multivendor solutions for both radios and consoles
through the FSI standard. The Stratus™ Controller is comprised of a server (located anywhere on the WAN / LAN)
with embedded firmware.
DFSI CONSOLE

DFSI CONSOLE

IP NETWORK (FSI)
IP NETWORK (FSI)
STRATUS™ CONTROLLER

PHYSICALLY LOCATED ANYWHERE ON NETWORK

IP NETWORK (FSI)
CODAN RADIO SYSTEM WITH UIC
TRANSMITTER

UIC

RECEIVER

FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

A D

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MICMODE

ANTENNA A

5
7

REF
IN

USB

VOL

REF
IN

CNTL
BUS

TX B

RF I N
USB

MIC

RF OUT
CNTL
BUS

RX B

IP NETWORK (FSI)
OVER DIGITAL MICOWAVE

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT
SPKR

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE
MADE IN CANADA

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MICMODE
TX A

USB

A D

METER
-

ZEROIZE
KEY

FREQUENCY (MHz)

SYSTEM REGULATOR
FUNCTION

12
11

ETHERNET

RX A

RECEIVER

FREQUENCY (MHz)

TX A

RX A

TRANSMITTER

UIC

10
SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF

CODAN RADIO SYSTEM WITH UIC

SYSTEM REGULATOR
FUNCTION

12
11

ETHERNET

IP NETWORK (FSI)
OVER 3G / 4G LTE CELLULAR

ANTENNA A

2
3

10
SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF

5
7

RX A

TX A

REF
IN

USB
RX A

VOL

METER
-

ZEROIZE
KEY

CNTL
BUS

TX A
USB

TX B

RF I N
USB

MIC

RF OUT
CNTL
BUS

RX B

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT
SPKR

MADE IN CANADA

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE
MADE IN CANADA

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

CODAN RADIO SYSTEM WITH UIC
TRANSMITTER

UIC

RECEIVER

FREQUENCY (MHz)

SYSTEM REGULATOR
FUNCTION

12
11

ETHERNET

REF
IN

A D

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

MICMODE

ANTENNA A

2
3

10
SQ. DISABLE
NORM
OFF

5
7

RX A

TX A

REF
IN

USB
RX A

VOL

METER
-

ZEROIZE
KEY

CNTL
BUS

TX A
USB

TX B

RF I N
USB

MIC

RF OUT
CNTL
BUS

RX B

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT
SPKR

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE
MADE IN CANADA

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

SUBSCRIBER
SUBSCRIBER

SUBSCRIBER

Figure 1: Sample Stratus™ Controller Application

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN670 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN670 Stratus™ Controller
The Stratus™ Controller listens to all incoming data from every connected radio site and every console. Each
connection (from site to site or console to site) uses routing rules configured in the software to decide on the routing
path. These routing paths are determined by NAC or Talk Group ID. Each connection can use different mapping.
The Stratus™ Controller has the capability to convert from any NAC to any Talk Group ID and vice versa. This
allows for any combination of mapping (affiliating) between all sites using any type of P25 code.
Local repeating (at the repeater site) will repeat ALL NACs since the receiver is programmed for $F7F at all sites.
Local Repeating can be done through the Stratus™ Controller however, latency (200 – 700 ms depending on
complexity) can occur.
Each site can allow ALL Unit IDs, or can be programmed to allow specific Unit IDs per site. The Stratus™ Controller
is not capable of routing based on Unit ID, but will block Units from sites.
The Stratus™ Controller has the following capabilities / features:
• Create an FSI Fixed Station connection
• Create an FSI Gateway connection
• Register P25 Talkgroups
• Register P25 Subscriber units
• Configure audio to be routed between specific FSI connections
• Using NAC based routing
• OR Talkgroup based routing
• Translate NAC codes for re-broadcast
• Log call activity and errors (playback not yet available)
• Forced remote reset
• Backup / Restore configuration files
• Update Firmware
• Buffer and correct network voice issues (with limitations)
• When used with a Codan UIC card
• Control channel selection
• Local repeat / No repeat / Stratus Controller repeat selection
• Read 9.5 VDC and 13.8 VDC voltage inputs
• Read 4 Analog and 4 Digital General Purpose I/O (GPIO) status
• Report Rx / Tx Status (Active / Inactive)

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN670 Rev 1-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN670 Stratus™ Controller
Stratus™ Controller Software Features
The Stratus™ Controller software allows for remote (IP) configuration and monitoring of the Stratus™ Controller
using any web browser as the Graphical User Interface (GUI). This means that no software package is required for
the Stratus™ Controller GUI.
The Stratus™ Controller GUI has a secure login screen as shown in Figure 2.

Figure 2: Stratus™ Controller GUI Secure Login

The Stratus™ Controller GUI allows the user to configure both DFSI parameters for each radio site as well as
multiple console DFSI connections through Fixed Site emulation, as shown in Figure 3.

Figure 3: Stratus™ Controller GUI Configuration

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN670 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN670 Stratus™ Controller
The Stratus™ Controller GUI shows the layout of the Stratus™ Controller system as a tree. Real-Time Site
Monitoring is available through the GUI that can display frequently updated (< 5 seconds) system status as
shown in Figure 4. The Stratus™ Controller GUI also has General purpose I/O (4 digital, 4 analog) and voltage
monitoring capability for each radio site.

Figure 4: Stratus™ Controller GUI Status

The Stratus™ Controller GUI allows for NAC (Normal Squelch) OR Talk Group ID (Selective Squelch) routing,
configurable at each site as shown in Figure 5. Priorities can also be set per site, for each NAC or TGID, to allow
different users or groups higher or lower routing priority if a signaling conflict occurs. See Figure 6.

Figure 5: Stratus™ Controller GUI NAC and TGID Routing

Figure 6: Stratus™ Controller GUI Priorities

Stratus™ is a trademark of Codan Limited.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN670 Rev 1-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN710 ET-3 Transportable Radio System Case
The ET-3 transportable radio system case is a rugged, waterproof aluminum case. Any standard 19” Codan subrack
can be mounted inside for repeater, crossband or base configurations.

The ET-3-03-00 Orange Transportable Case includes the following:
• 19” internal mounting frame for subrack and duplexers.
• smooth tamperproof and lockable latches.
• spring retracted stainless steel handles.
• pressure relief valve.
• pressure sealed RF and power inputs.
• metal cover on lid for magnetic mount antennas.
• optional internal AC to DC power supply.
The transportable radio case is 21” (53.3 cm) wide, 11” (27.9 cm) high and 15” (38.1 cm) deep, and weighs 35 lbs.
(15.88 kg) with typical radio package installed (10 lbs. or 4.54 kg empty).
Frequency band
AM
Lowband VHF
Highband VHF
400 MHz UHF
700 MHz UHF
800 MHz UHF
900 MHz UHF

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

RF Power Output
1.0 - 3.0 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 Watts
0.5 - 8.0 or 30 Watts
0.5 - 8.0 or 30 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 Watts

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

TN710 Rev 10-0-0 Aug 16

Internal duplexer frequency separation
No duplexer available
No duplexer available
≥ 2.0 MHz or ≥ 4.5 MHz separation
≥ 5.0 MHz separation
≥ 30 MHz separation
≥ 45 MHz separation
≥ 24 MHz or ≥ 39 MHz separation

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN710 ET-3 Transportable Radio System Case

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN710 Rev 10-0-0 Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN720 ET-4 Transportable Radio System Case and HiveNet
The ET-4 transportable radio system case is a compact watertight polyethylene case. Any standard 19” Codan
subrack can be mounted inside for repeater, crossband or base configurations.

The ET-4 case includes the following:
• 19” internal mounting frame with 9 RU of rack space for equipment.
• soft grip handles, in-line wheels, press and pull latches and a telescoping handle.
• interface connectors for RF and power inputs (optional Ethernet RJ45 connector available).
The ET-4 tranportable radio system typically holds:
• Subrack (3 RU).
• Duplexer (2RU).
• PSA-12-15-RB-20 Power Module that includes a 6 W speaker, AC-DC (110/220 Vac to 12 Vdc) power converter
and battery trickle charger for the internal 10.5 Ah Sealed Lead Acid (AGM) battery (2 RU).
• ET-4-A-ACC-BOX Accessory Storage Box case for tools, cables, microphone, etc. (2RU).

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN720 Rev 6-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN720 ET-4 Transportable Radio System Case and HiveNet
The transportable radio case is 24.6” (62.5 cm) wide, 11.7” (29.7 cm) high and 19.7” (50.0 cm) deep, and weighs
approximately 50 lbs. (22.68 kg) with typical radio package installed. The maximum depth for equipment from the
rack to the bottom of the case is 8.25” (20.96 cm).
Frequency band
Highband VHF
400 MHz UHF
700 MHz UHF
800 MHz UHF
900 MHz UHF

RF Power Output
0.5 - 8.0 or 30 Watts
0.5 - 8.0 or 30 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 Watts

Internal duplexer frequency separation
≥ 2.0 MHz or ≥ 4.5 MHz separation
≥ 5.0 MHz separation
≥ 30 MHz separation
≥ 45 MHz separation
≥ 24 MHz or ≥ 39 MHz separation

There are several different versions of the ET-4 case:
ET-4-A09-00
ET-4-A09-02
ET-4-A09-10
ET-4-A09-12

Black Polyethylene Transportable Case Only.
Black Polyethylene Transportable Case with Power Module and Accessory Storage Box.
Yellow Polyethylene Transportable Case Only.
Yellow Polyethylene Transportable Case with Power Module and Accessory Storage Box.

The ET-4 duty cycle and operating temperature is variable as follows:
Case Lid
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed

Duty Cycle
100%
100%
50%
10%

Operating Temperature Range
-40°C to +60°C
-40°C to +40°C
-40°C to +50°C
-40°C to +60°C

Typical battery capacity (@10% duty cycle with 30 Watts RF power output):
8 hours
30 hours
90 hours

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

(10.5 AHr internal battery)
(35 AHr external battery)
(100 AHr external battery)

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN720 Rev 6-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN720 ET-4 Transportable Radio System Case and HiveNet
HiveNet
HiveNet is a wide area conventional repeater network that is easily deployable and field agile.
Essentially, HiveNet is a network of repeaters that are linked together through RF links allowing the network to be
self-healing (linked repeaters can be added or removed at any time). This allows for a widely configurable system
with an expandable area of coverage for mobile and portable radios (subscribers).
HiveNet is available as an analog only or analog and P25 digital (mixed mode) repeater network giving the users
full forwards and backwards compatibility with existing legacy equipment. In P25 Digital mode, HiveNet will pass
all encrypted voice and data transparently through the repeater network. The HiveNet does not require or contain
any encryption in order to pass the encryption through the repeater and links.
HiveNet repeaters and links can be any frequency band (VHF, UHF, 700/800/900 MHz). One common example
is to have VHF repeaters with UHF links. HiveNet is based on a transportable repeater solution (ET-4) but can be
installed as a fixed network infrastructure.

Figure 1: HiveNet Wide Area System

A HiveNet repeater network can be configured as two or more separate repeaters connected together. Figure 1
shows a system of three HiveNet repeaters in use. Each repeater provides radio coverage for a local geographic
region utilizing a different transmit / receive frequency pair. The repeater sites are RF linked together such that
transmitted information from Subscriber 1 is received at HiveNet 1, then linked to and rebroadcast from each
HiveNet repeater in the system, allowing Subscriber 2 to receive the information from HiveNet 3. This allows each
subscriber to transmit information to any other subscriber anywhere on the network

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN720 Rev 6-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN720 ET-4 Transportable Radio System Case and HiveNet
Technical Description
HiveNet repeaters are made up of two transceivers, the repeater (sometimes referred to as the “Drop”), and the
Link. The Drop repeaters are on separate frequencies, while the link frequencies are matched (and reversed).
Figure 2 shows two HiveNet repeaters linked together with frequency pairs. The Link is referred to as a “Switched
Link”, meaning that the receiver and transmitter are never active at the same time.
A Switched Link is typically half-duplex, allowing use of a duplexer or antenna relay for the antenna connection.
• An antenna relay allows for a more frequency agile link, transceiver frequencies can be changed without the
need for any duplexer retuning.
• A duplexer allows the Switched Link to be changed to a Repeating Link if the system needs to be expanded for
more HiveNet repeaters.
• Simplex (same) frequencies can also be used on a two site Switched Link HiveNet with an antenna relay, but
every HiveNet repeater must Link directly to each other (no “Chains” of links).

The use of different repeaters all transmitting at the same time on different frequencies is called multicasting.

To / From
Subscribers

HiveNet 1

HiveNet 2

Drop

Switched link

Drop

Tx-F1

Tx-F3

Tx-F4

Tx-F5

Rx-F2

Rx-F4

Rx-F3

Rx-F6

Figure 2: HiveNet Network of Two Repeaters

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN720 Rev 6-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN720 ET-4 Transportable Radio System Case and HiveNet
HiveNet repeaters can be linked together to form different configurations depending on requirements. For larger
systems a repeating link may be required as a centralized “hub” for the network as shown in Figure 3. Repeating
Links are full duplex and require a duplexer for the antenna connection, and possibly multiple antennas with a
power splitter or a multi-directional antenna.

To / From
Subscribers

HiveNet 1

HiveNet 2

Drop

Switched link

Drop

Tx-F1
Rx-F2

Tx-F3
Rx-F4

Tx-F5
Rx-F6

To / From
Subscribers

HiveNet 4
Repeating
link
Tx-F4
Rx-F3

HiveNet 3
Drop

Switched link

Tx-F1
Rx-F2

Tx-F3
Rx-F4

To / From
Subscribers

Drop
Tx-F7
Rx-F8

Figure 3: HiveNet Network of Four Repeaters

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN720 Rev 6-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 5 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN720 ET-4 Transportable Radio System Case and HiveNet
Some HiveNet configurations may also require multiple switched links in order to former a “chain” of repeater links
as shown in Figure 4. This requires another set of frequencies and another transceiver pair, but can allow more
customizing of the configuration.
To / From
Subscribers

To / From
Subscribers

HiveNet 2

HiveNet 1

To / From
Subscribers

HiveNet 3

Drop

Tx-F1

Tx-F3

Tx-F5

Rx-F2

Rx-F4

Rx-F6

Switched link

Switched link Switched link

Switched link

Tx-F7

Tx-F8

Tx-F10

Tx-F9

Rx-F8

Rx-F7

Rx-F9

Rx-F10

Figure 4: HiveNet with Multiple Links

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 6 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN720 Rev 6-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN730 ET-5 Transportable Tactical Radio System
The ET-5 transportable tactical radio system is mounted in a compact watertight polyethylene case. Any Codan
MT-4E receiver and transmitter can be mounted inside for repeater configurations. The ET-5 supports analog and
transparent P25 digital (clear or secure) repeat capability.

The ET-5 includes the following:
• internal mounting frame for MT-4E receiver and transmitter.
• soft grip handle and press and pull latches.
• interface connectors for RF and power inputs.
• LED indicators for receive, transmit and power indication.
• internal duplexer mounting capability.
• USB type A to right angled 5 pin mini-type B programming cable (CBLC44-20904200)
• two switches to control the power input configuration (internal / external).
The ET-5 transportable tactical radio system can be powered by:
• a standard alkaline D-Cell battery pack (holding 16 batteries).
• a 10.5 Ah rechargeable lead acid battery.
• an external 12 Vdc power source (connector is located on the outside of the case).

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN730 Rev 3-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

May 14

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN730 ET-5 Transportable Tactical Radio System
The transportable radio case is 14.2” (36.1 cm) wide, 11.4” (29.0 cm) high and 6.5” (16.5 cm) deep, and weighs 20
lbs. (9.07 kg) fully equipped with batteries installed.
Frequency band
Highband VHF
400 MHz UHF
700 MHz UHF
800 MHz UHF
900 MHz UHF

RF Power Output
0.5 - 6.0 Watts
0.5 - 6.0 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 Watts

Internal duplexer frequency separation
≥ 4.5 MHz separation
≥ 5.0 MHz separation
≥ 30 MHz separation
≥ 45 MHz separation
≥ 24 MHz or ≥ 39 MHz separation

* The RF power output of the Highband VHF and 400 MHz UHF transmitter is rated at a maximum of 6.0 Watts when
installed in the ET-5 case (typical power output of these transmitters is 8.0 Watts).
Typical battery capacity (@20% duty cycle with 6.0 Watts RF power output):
16 alkaline D-Cells batteries
internal 10.5 Ah lead acid battery
external 35 Ah lead acid battery

19 hours
20 hours
52 hours

The ET-5 operating temperature is rated at -20°C to +50°C when using the internal batteries. When using the
external battery, the operating temperature is rated at -30°C to +60°C.
The ET-5 is rated for 100% continuous duty operation.
The ET-5 case with the inside panel removed is shown in Figure 1. This shows how the MT-4E receiver and
transmitter are mounted inside of the ET-5 case.

RECEIVER
TRANSMITTER

Figure 1: ET-5 case with inside panel removed

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN730 Rev 3-0-0

Mar 14

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN735 Vizor™ (ET-6) Transportable Tactical Radio System
The Vizor™ (ET-6) transportable tactical radio system is mounted in a compact watertight polyethylene case. Any
Codan receiver, transmitter and 30 Watt power amplifier can be mounted inside for repeater or base configurations.
The Vizor™ (ET-6) supports analog and transparent P25 digital (clear or secure) repeat capability.

The Vizor™ (ET-6) includes the following:
• internal mounting frame for receiver, transmitter and 30 Watt power amplifier.
• soft grip handle and press and pull latches.
• interface connectors for RF and AC/DC power inputs (internal or external).
• internal “quick change” duplexer mounting capability.
• lightweight OTTO headset (A-HEADSET-01).
• USB type A to right angled 5 pin mini-type B programming cable (CBLC44-20904200)
• 15 Amp 110 / 220 VAC power supply with battery backup
• front panel control interface
The following options are available for the Vizor™ (ET-6):
• A-MIC-05 hand microphone compatible with the headset connector.
• A-PK-RELAY-02 Antenna Relay for base station operation.
There are two different versions of the Vizor™ (ET-6):
ET-6-M03-01
ET-6-M03-02

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN735 Rev 4-0-0

Standard external RF and power connectors.
Internal stealth RF and power connectors

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN735 Vizor™ (ET-6) Transportable Tactical Radio System
The Vizor™ (ET-6) tranportable radio system comes with a front panel control interface with the following features:
• internal interface connectors for RF and AC/DC power inputs (for stealth appearance with the lid closed).
• LED indicators for receive, transmit, power and speaker power indication.
• Clear / Secure select switch and Clear Keys button for encrypted base capability.
• 16 position channel select rotary switch.
• speaker / headset select, 12 pin Hirose connector for headset, volume control knob and main power switch.
• DB25 auxiliary connector for direct connection to a Telex DSP-223 or IP-223 / IP-224 (or another external device).
The transportable radio is 18.2” (46.2 cm) wide, 6.7” (17.0 cm) high and 13.4” (34.0 cm) deep, and weighs 28 lbs.
(12.70 kg) fully equipped.
Frequency band
Highband VHF
400 MHz UHF
700 MHz UHF
800 MHz UHF
900 MHz UHF

RF Power Output
0.5 - 8.0 or 30 Watts
0.5 - 8.0 or 30 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 Watts

Internal duplexer frequency separation
≥ 4.5 MHz separation
≥ 5.0 MHz separation
≥ 30 MHz separation
≥ 45 MHz separation
≥ 24 MHz or ≥ 39 MHz separation

The Vizor™ (ET-6) duty cycle and operating temperature is variable as follows:
Case Lid
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 4

Duty Cycle
100%
100%
50%
10%

Operating Temperature Range
-30°C to +60°C (Optional -40°C to +60°C)
-30°C to +10°C (Optional -40°C to +10°C)
-30°C to +40°C (Optional -40°C to +40°C)
-30°C to +60°C (Optional -40°C to +60°C)

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN735 Rev 4-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN735 Vizor™ (ET-6) Transportable Tactical Radio System
The Vizor™ (ET-6) case with the lid removed is shown in Figure 1. This shows how the receiver, transmitter and
power amplifier are mounted inside of the Vizor™ (ET-6) case.

30 WATT POWER
AMPLIFIER

TRANSMITTER

RECEIVER

Figure 1: Vizor™ (ET-6) case with case lid removed

The DB25 auxiliary connector pinout is as follows:
Pin
7
8
9
12
13
14
17
20
21
22
24
25

Function
Ground
Transmitter CSEL0
Transmitter CSEL2
Receiver Balanced O/P 2
Transmitter Balanced I/P 2
Transmitter PTT I/P
Transmitter Secure / Clear I/P
+13.8 Vdc / Receiver COR
Transmitter CSEL1
Transmitter CSEL3
Receiver Balanced O/P 1
Transmitter Balanced I/P 1

Notes
Jumper JU5A installed to operate
Jumper JU5A installed to operate

Pull to ground for Clear mode
Jumper JU1A (DSP-223) / Jumper JU1B (IP-223 / IP-224)
Jumper JU5A installed to operate
Jumper JU5A installed to operate

The IP-223 / IP-224 also requires that 2 pins on the DB25 (PTT COM - pin2 and MON COM - pin 16) are wired to
ground for proper operation.

Vizor™ is a trademark of Codan Limited.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN735 Rev 4-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN735 Vizor™ (ET-6) Transportable Tactical Radio System

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN735 Rev 4-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN750 ET-1 Transportable Radio System Case
The ET-1 transportable radio system case is a rugged, weatherproof case constructed from high density polyethylene
with reinforced walls. It has recessed handles, smooth latches, anodized valences and a pressure relief valve. The
rack is shock mounted and the lid gasket is water tight. Any standard 19” Codan subrack can be mounted inside.
Racks are mounted inside the front and back of the case. Codan subracks can be mounted back to back on both
front and back racks. Optional duplexers can also be mounted inside the case in the 19” rack. Contact the factory
for weight limitations.

The transportable radio case is available in four sizes, a 6 RU (Rack Unit) height, a 9 RU (Rack Unit) height., a 12
RU (Rack Unit) height, and a 15 RU (Rack Unit) height. Contact the factory for other heights available.
Dimensions for ET-1-A06-00 (6 RU Height Shelf)
Outside Depth:
Outside Width:
Outside Height:
Weight (Case Only):

31” (78.7 cm)
26” (66 cm)
18.4” (46.7 cm)
44 lbs. (19.96 kg)

Internal Rack Depth:
Internal Rack Width:
Internal Rack Height:

20” (50.8 cm)
19” (standard mounting)
10.625” (27 cm)

Internal Rack Depth:
Internal Rack Width:
Internal Rack Height:

20” (50.8 cm)
19” (standard mounting)
15.875” (40.3 cm)

Dimensions for ET-1-A09-00 (9 RU Height Shelf)
Outside Depth:
Outside Width:
Outside Height:
Weight (Case Only):

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN750 Rev 6-0-0

31” (78.7 cm)
26” (66 cm)
23.4” (59.4 cm)
58 lbs. (26.31 kg)

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

May 14

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN750 ET-1 Transportable Radio System Case
Dimensions for ET-1-A12-00 (12 RU Height Shelf)
Outside Depth:
Outside Width:
Outside Height:
Weight (Case Only):

31” (78.7 cm)
26” (66 cm)
29.2” (74.2 cm)
73 lbs. (33.11 kg)

Internal Rack Depth:
Internal Rack Width:
Internal Rack Height:

20” (50.8 cm)
19” (standard mounting)
21.125” (53.8 cm)

Dimensions for ET-1-A15-00 (15 RU Height Shelf)
Outside Depth:
Outside Width:
Outside Height:
Weight (Case Only):

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

31” (78.7 cm)
26” (66 cm)
34.2” (86.9 cm)
90 lbs. (40.82 kg)

Internal Rack Depth:
Internal Rack Width:
Internal Rack Height:

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

20” (50.8 cm)
19” (standard mounting)
26.375” (67 cm)

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN750 Rev 6-0-0

May 14

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN760 Stratus™ Transportable Tactical Radio System
The Stratus™ transportable tactical radio system is mounted in a compact watertight polyethylene case. Any
Codan receiver, transmitter and 30 Watt (or 25 Watt) power amplifier can be mounted inside for repeater or base
configurations. The Stratus™ supports analog and transparent P25 digital (clear or secure) repeat capability. The
Stratus™ repeater incorporates a Sierra Wireless cellular modem to backhaul P25 Digital Fixed Station Interface
(DFSI) compliant signalling across existing cellular 3G or 4G Long Term Evolution (LTE) infrastructure. The cellular
backhaul can be used to interconnect multiple Stratus™ repeaters / base stations to each other, or to P25 DFSI
compliant consoles. This interconnectivity is achieved via a Stratus™ controller which acts as an arbitrator for
multiple DFSI interconnects.

The Stratus™ tactical radio system includes the following:
• internal mounting frame for receiver, transmitter and 30 Watt (VHF/UHF) or 25 Watt (700/800 MHz) power amplifier.
• soft grip handle and press and pull latches.
• external interface connectors for RF and power inputs.
• duplexer with internal “quick change” duplexer mounting capability.
• cellular modem with internal “quick change” cellular modem mounting capability.
• lightweight OTTO headset (A-HEADSET-01).
• 110/220 VAC (auto-switching) to 12 VDC external power supply (22A)
• front panel control interface
The current draw of the Stratus™ transportable system is:
Standby
Transmit (Active)

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN760 Rev 1-0-0

750 mA ±10%
7.0 A ±10%

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN760 Stratus™ Transportable Tactical Radio System
There are two different versions of the Stratus™ transportable radio system:
LMR-STRATUS-CPXXX

Stratus™ with full cellular (3G / 4G LTE) capability
(modem, antennas, UIC and firmware)
Stratus™ LiTE with no cellular, antennas or UIC and firmware capability
(upgradeable - LMR-STRATUS-LITUP)

LMR-STRATUS-LPXXX

Stratus™ transportable radio system options include:
LMR-STRATUS-LITUP
STRATUS-LiTE-IPS-1
STRATUS-EXTCBL-1 DC
A-PK-RELAY-03
LMR-TRANSOP-EBAS1

Stratus™ LiTE upgrade to full cellular capability
(modem, antennas, UIC and firmware)
Stratus™ LiTE with internal 110/220 VAC (auto-switching) to 12 VDC power supply
DC power extension cable
Antenna relay with mounting bracket for base station operation
AES-256 / DES-OFB 64-bit encryption hardware and firmware, with key loader cable
and antenna relay with mounting bracket for base station operation

The Stratus™ tranportable radio system comes with a front panel control interface with the following features:
• LED indicators for receive, transmit, connect (to the network) and VSWR.
• power switch (acts as a 20 Amp breaker switch and lights up when powered).
• built in DC Voltmeter.
• Clear / Secure select switch and Clear Keys button for encrypted base capability.
• 16 position channel select rotary switch and A/B bank select switch (for up to 32 channels).
• speaker / headset select, 12 pin Hirose connector for headset and volume control knob.
• Local / Remote select switch for channel select control either through the front panel switches or network.
• Repeat / Base select switch for operation mode (Base is for Simplex operation only).
• High / Low power select switch for full power (30 Watts) or half power (15 Watts) selection (only VHF and UHF).
The Stratus™ transportable radio is 19.2” (48.8 cm) wide, 7.3” (18.5 cm) high and 15.2” (38.6 cm) deep, and weighs
32 lbs. (14.50 kg) fully equipped.
Frequency band
Highband VHF
400 MHz UHF
700 MHz UHF
800 MHz UHF
900 MHz UHF

RF Power Output
0.5 - 8.0 or 15/30 Watts
0.5 - 8.0 or 15/30 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 or 25 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 or 25 Watts
0.5 - 3.0 Watts

Internal duplexer frequency separation
≥ 4.5 MHz separation
≥ 5.0 MHz separation
≥ 30 MHz separation
≥ 45 MHz separation
≥ 24 MHz or ≥ 39 MHz separation

The Stratus™ duty cycle and operating temperature is variable as follows:
Case Lid
Open
Closed
Closed

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 4

Duty Cycle
100%
100%
50%

Operating Temperature Range
-40°C to +60°C
-40°C to +40°C
-40°C to +50°C

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN760 Rev 1-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN760 Stratus™ Transportable Tactical Radio System
The Stratus™ case with the lid removed is shown in Figure 1. This shows how the receiver, transmitter, UIC, cellular modem, duplexer and power amplifier are mounted inside of the Stratus™ case.

30 WATT POWER
AMPLIFIER

DUPLEXER

CELLULAR MODEM

UIC

TRANSMITTER

RECEIVER

Figure 1: Stratus™ case with case lid removed

The Stratus™ cellular modem is carrier specific and is also available with optional Wi-Fi capability The modems
operate on carriers and Wi-Fi as follows:
CI-MODEM-01
CI-MODEM-02
CI-MODEM-03
CI-MODEM-04
CI-MODEM-05

Telus / Bell / Rogers
AT&T
Verizon
International
Sprint

CI-MODEM-W1
CI-MODEM-W2
CI-MODEM-W3
CI-MODEM-W4
CI-MODEM-W5

Telus / Bell / Rogers (Wi-Fi capable)
AT&T (Wi-Fi capable)
Verizon (Wi-Fi capable)
International (Wi-Fi capable)
Sprint (Wi-Fi capable)

The Stratus™ also has an optional polyethylene case (18.2” (46.2 cm) wide, 6.7” (17.0 cm) high and 13.4” (34.0
cm) deep ) with slotted foam to house spare mounting plates for duplexers and antenna relays (up to 3):
STRATUS-DUPCASE-1
3702-63608124
DUP-144-174EKHB
DUP-380-406EMEB
DUP-406-512EMEB
DUP-768-806EWAB
DUP-806-896EYAB
DUP-896-960EUCB

Duplexer and antenna relay carrying case (3 slots)
Duplexer mounting plate
VHF Duplexer, 144-174 MHz, ≥ 4.5 MHz separation
UHF Duplexer, 380-406 MHz, ≥ 5.0 MHz separation
UHF Duplexer, 406-512 MHz, ≥ 5.0 MHz separation
UHF Duplexer, 768-806 MHz, ≥ 30 MHz separation
UHF Duplexer, 806-896 MHz, ≥ 45 MHz separation
UHF Duplexer, 896-960 MHz, ≥ 24 MHz separation

Stratus™ is a trademark of Codan Limited.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN760 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN760 Stratus™ Transportable Tactical Radio System

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN760 Rev 1-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN761 Stratus™ Fixed Infrastructure Radio System
A Stratus™ Fixed Infrastructure Radio System supports analog and transparent P25 digital (clear or secure) repeat
capability and incorporates a Sierra Wireless cellular modem to backhaul P25 Digital Fixed Station Interface (DFSI)
compliant signalling across existing cellular 3G or 4G Long Term Evolution (LTE) infrastructure. The cellular
backhaul can be used to interconnect multiple Stratus™ repeaters / base stations to each other, or to P25 DFSI
compliant consoles. This interconnectivity is achieved via a Stratus™ controller which acts as an arbitrator for
multiple DFSI interconnects.

Up to four Codan UIC controllers can be linked to a single Stratus™ Fixed Link Infrastructure device at each site,
enabling multiple systems to take advantage of the Stratus™ Fixed Infrastructure capabilities.
Stratus™ Fixed Infrastructure can be easily added to existing MT-4E equipment by the addition of a Stratus™ Fixed
Infrastructure upgrade which includes the UIC card, DFSI firmware, and the Stratus™ Fixed Link Infrastructure
equipment which includes full cellular capability (modem and antenna) and a 4-port ethernet switch.
Stratus™ Fixed Infrastructure provides the opportunity to remove the dependence on costly leased telco lines and
T1 connections at a fraction of the cost.
The current draw of the Stratus™Fixed Link Infrastructure (not including MT-4E) is 500 mA to 750 mA @ 13.8
VDC

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN761 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN761 Stratus™ Fixed Infrastructure Radio System
The Stratus™ Fixed Link Infrastructure includes the following:
• 2 RU (rack unit) harware mounting shelf.
• 6 to 34 VDC input power supply.
• 2 N-type 3G/4G LTE Antenna connectors (2nd connector is for a diversity antenna).
• 2 690 - 2700 MHz 3G / 4G LTE wall-mount omni-directional groundplane independant antennas (2 dBi gain).
• SMA connector for Wi-Fi antenna.
• BNC connector for GPS antenna (future capability).
• 4-port ethernet switch.
• cellular modem.
• front panel power LED.
Part numbers for the Stratus™ Fixed Infrastructure are as follows:
LMR-STRATUS-FPXXX
LMR-STRATUS-FIXUP

Stratus™ Fixed Link with MT-4E radio system (30 Watt P25 capable system)
Stratus™ Fixed Link upgrade to existing MT-4E radio system

The Stratus™ Fixed Link Infrastructure is 19” rack mountable, 2 RU (3.5” / 8.8 cm) high and 7.5” (19 cm) deep, and
weighs 10.5 lbs. (4.6 kg).
The Stratus™ cellular modem is carrier specific and is also available with optional Wi-Fi capability The modems
operate on carriers and Wi-Fi as follows:
CI-MODEM-01
CI-MODEM-02
CI-MODEM-03
CI-MODEM-04
CI-MODEM-05

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 4

Telus / Bell / Rogers
AT&T
Verizon
International
Sprint

CI-MODEM-W1
CI-MODEM-W2
CI-MODEM-W3
CI-MODEM-W4
CI-MODEM-W5

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Telus / Bell / Rogers (Wi-Fi capable)
AT&T (Wi-Fi capable)
Verizon (Wi-Fi capable)
International (Wi-Fi capable)
Sprint (Wi-Fi capable)

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN761 Rev 1-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN761 Stratus™ Fixed Infrastructure Radio System
The Stratus™ Fixed Link case with the lid removed is shown in Figure 1. This shows how cellular modem, ethernet switch and power supply are mounted inside of the Stratus™ Fixed Link case.

POWER
SWITCH &
SOURCE

ETHERNET
SWITCH

ETHERNET
JACKS

POWER
DISTRIBUTION

CELLULAR
ANTENNA
CONNECTORS

GPS & WI-FI
ANTENNA
CONNECTORS

CELLULAR MODEM

Figure 1: Stratus™ Fixed Link case with case lid removed

Stratus™ Fixed Link Infrastructure includes two 3G / 4G LTE waterproof omni-directional groundplane independant
antennas with 2 dBi of gain. These antennas include a steel zinc plated finish L-Bracket for wall mounting. The
antennas have N-Female connectors and a white UV-resistant sheath.

Figure 2: 3G / 4G LTE omni-directional antennas

Stratus™ is a trademark of Codan Limited.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN761 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN761 Stratus™ Fixed Infrastructure Radio System

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN761 Rev 1-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN765 Stratus™ Tactical Controller
The Stratus™ Tactical Controller is based on the Stratus™ Controller technology and is housed in a rapidly
deployable, rugged, compact watertight polyethylene transportable case that can be located anywhere in the world
with a cellular 3G or 4G Long Term Evolution (LTE) connection. The portable network connection is achieved using
the same Sierra Wireless cellular modem found in all Stratus™ Repeaters.
The Stratus™ Tactical Controller will route calls between multiple Stratus™ Repeaters. The Controller receives
the digital audio and control signals from the VHF/UHF repeaters via the cellular IP link and routes the P25
communications within the network, with all encrypted calls routed transparently.

The Stratus™ Tactical Controller has the same capabilities as the Stratus™ Controller except the VPN server has
a limitation of 10 Stratus™ repeater / console connections. The Stratus™ Tactical Controller has the advantage of
keeping all control and routing outside of the existing network, and IT organization. The VPN server encrypts all
communications over the Stratus™ network.
The Stratus™ Tactical Controller includes the following:
• soft grip handle and press and pull latches.
• internal cellular modem.
• external interface connectors for DC power input.
• 110/220 VAC (auto-switching) to 12 VDC external power supply (22A).
• an RJ45 Ethernet connector for direct connection to network or console.
The Stratus™ Tactical Controller is 14.2” (36.1 cm) wide, 6.5” (16.5 cm) high and 11.4” (28.9 cm) deep, and
weighs 15 lbs. (6.80 kg). The current draw of the Stratus™ Tactical Controller is 1.5 Amps (±10%)
The Stratus™ cellular modem ioperates on carriers as follows:
CI-MODEM-01
CI-MODEM-02
CI-MODEM-03
CI-MODEM-04
CI-MODEM-05

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN765 Rev 1-0-0

Telus / Bell / Rogers
AT&T
Verizon
International
Sprint

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN765 Stratus™ Tactical Controller
The Stratus™ Tactical Controller is shown below in a standard system configuration with two Stratus™ transportable repeaters and a Stratus™ fixed site. A DFSI console is connected directly into the RJ45 Ethernet connector
on the side of the Stratus™ Tactical Controller case.

Stratus™ is a trademark of Codan Limited.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN765 Rev 1-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN790 Transportable Radio System Accessories
Codan Radio Communications has a number of accessories available for the Transportable Radio System cases.

Tactical Antenna
• broadband 1/2 wave antenna.
• 2.0 dB of gain.
• no ground plane required.
• corrosion and weather resistant.
• VHF (138 - 174 MHz) ANT-TCANT-577
• UHF (406 - 470 MHz) ANT-F-33116

External Battery and Case
• 35 Ah external battery: PSBENC-002
• 100 Ah external battery: PSBENC-005
• Sealed Lead Acid 12 Vdc AGM in weatherproof case.
• comes with interconnect cable that connects to the
transportable radio.
• PSBENC-002: 7.7” height; 11.8” width; 9.8” depth.
weighs 28 lbs. (12.7 kg).
• PSBENC-005: 8.9” height; 21.7” width; 14.1” depth.
weighs 75 lbs. (34.0 kg).

Solar Panel Kit (PSS-PS-60W-02)
• 60 Watt solar panel.
• comes in a sealed weatherproof case.
• comes with interconnect cable that connects to both
the transportable radio or the external battery case.
• charge controller (regulator) included.
• dimensions: 0.06” height; 42” width; 60” depth.
• weighs 12 lbs. (5.4 kg).

Antenna Mast System
• available heights of 3, 7 or 10 meters
• made from 100% corrosive free alloys.
• stores in a rugged wheeled bag for easy transport.
• Mil-Spec 810F
• 3 meter (9’ 10”) kit: ANT-MASTSYS-01
• 7 meter (22’ 11”) kit: ANT-MASTSYS-02
• 10 meter (32’ 9”) kit: ANT-MASTSYS-03

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN790 Rev 5-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

May 14

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN790 Transportable Radio System Accessories

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN790 Rev 5-0-0

May 14

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN791 Stratus™ Power Center
The Stratus™ Power Center is a compact and rugged polycarbonate transportable case that provides a 12 V DC
power source to the Stratus™ Transportable Tactical Radio System or other Codan transportable repeaters. The
35 A hour battery housed in the power center is charged and maintained by a 15 V DC input from an AC/DC power
supply or optional solar panel.

The Stratus™ Power Center includes the following:
• internal custom foam for protection against daily bumps.
• soft grip handles, in-line wheels, press and pull latches and a telescoping handle.
• 35 A hour battery with an internal battery charger.
• on-board battery percent status indicator and current meter.
• internal 30 A breaker for short-circuit protection, and charging over-current protection.
• an external DC output connector for supplying power.
• an external DC input connector for AC/DC power supply or other DC inputs (vehicle cigarette lighter).
• an external DC input connector for optional solar panel.
• Meter Power switch and Charge Select switch for selection of DC input charging.
The Stratus™ Power Center can output 20 Amps maximum @ 12VDC and can power a Stratus™ repeater for 20
hours at a 10% duty cycle. Figure 1 shows the front panel meters and switches on the Stratus™ Power Center.

Figure 1: Stratus™ front panel meters and switches

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN791 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN791 Stratus™ Power Center
Part numbers for the Stratus™ Power Center are as follows:
LMR-STRATUS-POWC1
STRATUS-PSA-1
STRATUS-EXTCBL-1 DC
LMR-STRATUS-SOLP3

Stratus™ Power Center
110/220 VAC (auto-switching) to 12 VDC power supply
DC power extension cable
60 Watt optional solar power kit

The Stratus™ Power Center is 14.1” (35.8 cm) wide, 8.9” (22.6 cm) high and 21.7” (55.1 cm) deep, and weighs 48
lbs. (21.80 kg) fully loaded.
The Stratus™ Power Center is also capable of powering the ET-1, ET-3, ET-4, ET-5, and Vizor™ (ET-6)
transportable radio systems with the addition of these parts and labour:
7831-35502183
5076-P1611P25
STRATUS-PSA-1
One Hour Labour

DC power cable
Plug
110/220 VAC (auto-switching) to 12 VDC power supply (recommended for
charging the Stratus™ Power Center)
Factory Labour

Stratus™ is a trademark of Codan Limited.
Vizor™ is a trademark of Codan Limited.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN791 Rev 1-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN792 Stratus™ Rapid Antenna
The Stratus™ Rapid Antenna is a compact, lightweight and robust rapidly deployable antenna solution. The antenna
is enclosed in a patented Rolatube mast made of thermoplastic reinforced composites that transports as a flat coil
then rapidly expands into a rigid mast within seconds. The cable antenna is hooked inside of an end cap, which is
slid securely onto the top of the Rolotube mast. The antenna is enclosed inside of the mast.

The Stratus™ Rapid Antenna comes in a custom built
backpack, and includes a base unit that stores the
Rolotube mast. Two tensioning knobs on the base unit
are used to allow the mast to expand easily through the
top of the base.
The base unit can be secured to the ground using steel
rock pegs and three additional guy wires may be used
to give the mast additional stability.
The Stratus™ Rapid Antenna mast is 2” in diameter, will
reach up to 4 meters (13 feet) in height, can withstand
winds up to 100 km/h (62 mph), is corrosion and
weather resistant to the MIL-STD-810G environmental
standard, and does not require a ground plane.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN792 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN792 Stratus™ Rapid Antenna
The Stratus™ Rapid Antenna ANT-TACSYSTEM includes the following:
• custom built backpack.
• base unit with tensioning knobs and built-in mast.
• 3” end cap and cable hook adapter for connectiing the antenna.
• 9 steel rock pegs (25 cm / 9.8”) with green tops for securing antenna mast and guy wires.
• 3 sets of guy wires (7.5 m / 24.6 feet) for securing mast.
• tactical cable antenna (7.6 m / 25 feet).
Five different tactical antennas with 25 feet (7.6m) of LMR 195 coaxial cable are available for the Stratus™ Rapid
Antenna:
Part Number
ANT-TAC-VHF-06
ANT-TAC-UHF-02
ANT-TAC-UHF-03
ANT-TAC-800-001
ANT-TAC-800-002

Frequency Range
138 - 174 MHz
380 - 470 MHz
450 - 520 MHz
746 - 896 MHz
806 - 960 MHz

Antenna Gain
2 dB
2 dB
2 dB
2 dB
2 dB

The Stratus™ Rapid Antenna is 15” (38.1 cm) wide, 23” (58.4cm) high and 13” (33.0 cm) deep, and weighs 31 lbs.
(14.1 kg) in the custom backpack.

Stratus Rapid Antenna Kit

Custom Backpack

Base Unit

Stratus™ is a trademark of Codan Limited.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN792 Rev 1-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN800 A-PNL-AUX96-3 Auxiliary Connector

The A-PNL-AUX96-3 option provides convenient
access to all signals on the motherboard auxiliary
control connector. This is accomplished with two circuit
boards: the Terminal Block board and the Connector
board. The Terminal Block board mounts to the subrack
rear panel and has six 16 pin headers that mate with 16
position plug-in screw connectors. The plug-in screw
connectors use a clamping action to secure stranded or
solid conductor wires from 22 AWG to 16 AWG and have
locking screws to ensure the connector does not loosen
due to vibration. A label on the back of the subrack
rear panel lists the signals at their respective positions.
The Connector board is soldered to the Terminal Block
board and provides the interconnection between the
auxiliary control connector on the motherboard and the
Terminal Block board.

PLUG IN SCREW
CONNECTORS
TERMINAL
BLOCK BOARD

CONNECTOR
BOARD

A-PNL-AUX96-3
HEADERS AND LABEL
J1

1 1
1
2
1
2
1
2
O/P
O/P I/P 1 I/P 2
t I/P O/P O/P
t I/P O/P O/P
I/P I/P
Bal B Bal B COR
PTTA SubA Bal A Bal A COR
B Disc
A DiscB Bal B Bal B PTTB SubB
A Bal A Bal A
Tx Tx Tx Rx Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Tx Tx Rx Rx Rx Rx

l D0 l D1 l D2 l D3 l D0 l D1 l D2 l D3 l D0 l D1 l D2 l D3 l D0 l D1 l D2 l D3
CSeA CSeA CSeA CSe CSe CSe CSe CSeB CSeB CSeB CSeB CSe
B
B
B
B
A CSeA CSeA CSeA CSeA
Tx Tx Tx Rx Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Tx Tx Rx Rx Rx Rx

GPIO 1

9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
7
8
3
6
1
2
4
5
O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O O
GPI GPI GPI GPI GPI GPI GPI GPI GPI GPI GPI GPI GPI GPI GPI GPI

O/P emp GPIO 12
O/P emp r
r
LP DeLP De- Ove e
Ove e
und und und und Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc A Sql A ModA DiscA Sql B Sql B ModB DiscB Sql
GPIO 13
Gro Gro Gro Gro 13.8 13.8 9.5 9.5 Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx

n
n
Rev
Rev
R FwdR Mod /Clr Out Stre e
R FwdR Mod /Clr Out Stre e
17
Sec PTTB Sig B Mut
SecA PTTA Sig A Mut O 18B VSW
O A VSW
A VSW
B VSW
B Dir B
B
A Dir A
GPI Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Rx Rx GPI Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Rx Rx

N/C
O/P
O/P
Mon
Mon Rly k Sel k Sel /Clr
k Sel
k Sel /Clr
21
20
22 23
Sec O 19 9.5VA 9.5VA COR
O
A BanB BanB SecO B 9.5VB 9.5VO B BanO
A
A BanA
Tx Rx GPI Rx Rx Rx Rx Tx Rx GPI Rx Rx GPI Rx GPI GPI

GPIO 2
GPIO 3
GPIO 4
GPIO 5
GPIO 6
GPIO 7
GPIO 8
GPIO 9
GPIO 10
GPIO 11

GPIO 14
GPIO 15
GPIO 16
GPIO 17
GPIO 18
GPIO 19
GPIO 20
GPIO 21
GPIO 22

Pin 1

Wire Sizes: 22 AWG Min, 16 AWG Max

GPIO 23

Pin 16

SUBRACK REAR VIEW

2
P
/P
1
2
P1 1
P1 P1 P2
O/ I/P 1 I/P 2
t I/ O/P O/P R
t I/ O/ O/ R c O
I/P I/P
al al PTT Sub Bal Bal CO Disc Bal Bal PTT Sub Bal Bal CO Dis
ABxAB xA xA xA xA xA xA x B x B x B x B x B x B x B x B
T R
T
T
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
T
R
T
T

2
1
0
3
3
0
2
1
1
0
3
2
3
2
1
0
lD lD lD lD lD lD lD lD lD lD lD lD lD lD lD lD
Se Se Se Se C S e C S e C S e C S e CSe CSe CSe CSe CSe CSe CSe CSe
A Cx A Cx A Cx A C x A x A x A x A x B x B x B x B x B x B x B x B
x
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T

A-PNL-AUX96-3

GPIO 1
GPIO 2
GPIO 3
GPIO 4
GPIO 5
GPIO 6

10 11 12 13 14 15 16
9
8
7
6
3
5
4
2
1
IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO
GP GP GP GP GP GP GP GP GP GP GP GP GP GP GP GP

GPIO 7
GPIO 8
GPIO 9
GPIO 10
GPIO 11

/P mp
/P mp
GPIO 12
er
P O -e
P O -e er
Ov de c L De Ov de c L l De
d nd nd nd Vdc Vdc dc dc Sql Mo Dis Sql Sql Mo Dis Sq
n
GPIO 13
ou rou rou rou 3.8 3.8 .5 V .5 V x A x A Rx A Rx A x B x B Rx B Rx B
r
R
1
1
R
R
R
9
9
G G G G

GPIO 14
GPIO 15
GPIO 16

wd Rev d
wd Rev d
n
n
t
t
o Clr Ou tre
o /Clr Ou Stre te
RF R
RF R
u 18 SW SW ir M ec/ TT ig S ute
17 SW SW ir M ec TT ig
IO x A V x A V A D x A S x A P x A S x A M PIO B V x B V x B D x B S B P x B S x B M
P
G Tx T
G
T
T
T
R
T
T
R
R
Tx T
Tx R

GPIO 17
GPIO 18
GPIO 19
GPIO 20

A close-up view of the auxiliary connector
label shows the short signal name for
each connection point. Definitions for
these signals can be found in the SR39-1 subrack manual. Extra General
Purpose Input / Output connectors
(GPIO) that can be used for different
functions depending on the control card
are listed to the right of the connectors.
For example, the AC-3E audio control
card uses these lines for auxiliary audio
inputs / outputs and auxiliary COR /
PTT connections. The CI-PM-3 paging
modulator uses these signal lines for
connecting A/D select lines, 2-level and
4-level data, etc. The custom functions
of these connectors will be marked in the
blank space next to the signal name.

GPIO 21
GPIO 22

Pin 1

/C
P
/P
n yN l
l
O/
el
on
el lr O
Mo R Rl k Se k Se /Clr
kS
k S /C
VM
an Sec 19 9.5V 9.5V CO Ban Ban Sec 20 9.5V 9.5 O 21 Ban 22 23
B
O
A x A PIO x A x A x A x A x B x B PI x B x B PI x B PIO PIO
x
R
G
R
R
R
R
G
R G
R G
T
T
G
R
R

Wire Sizes: 22 AWG Min, 16 AWG Max

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN800 Rev 5-0-0

See Table 1 and Table 2 for a list of
connector names by control card and by
transmitter and receiver series.

Pin 16

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 13

GPIO 23

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN800 A-PNL-AUX96-3 Auxiliary Connector
Table 1: Auxiliary Control Connector Definitions for Control Cards
Name

Old Name

Pin #

AC-3E

CI-BC-4E

CI-PM-3

UIC-4

GPIO 1

Spare 1

J3-1

AUX 1 AUDIO I/P 1

DATA OUT

GPAI2 I/P

GPIO 2

Spare 2

J3-2

AUX 1 AUDIO I/P 2

CTCSS HU/BUSY

GPAI3 I/P

GPIO 3

Spare 3

J3-3

AUX 2 AUDIO I/P 1

REF FAIL ALARM***

GPAI0 I/P

GPIO 4

Spare 4

J3-4

AUX 2 AUDIO I/P 2

N/C

GPAI1 I/P

GPIO 5

Spare 5

J3-5

AUX 1 AUDIO O/P 1 AUX 1 AUDIO O/P 1

EXT B/W SEL****

GPAO2 O/P

GPIO 6

Spare 6

J3-6

AUX 1 AUDIO O/P 2 AUX 1 AUDIO O/P 2

N/C

GPAO3 O/P

GPIO 7

IMC 1

J3-7

AUX 2 AUDIO O/P 1

CLEAR KEYS 1

N/C

CLEAR KEYS 1

GPIO 8

IMC 2

J3-8

AUX 2 AUDIO O/P 2

CLEAR KEYS 2

N/C

CLEAR KEYS 2

GPIO 9

Alarm 1

J3-9

AUX 1 COR C

PTT

GPDO0 O/P

GPIO 10

Alarm 2

J3-10

AUX 1 COR E

A/D MODE SEL

GPDO1 O/P

GPIO 11

Alarm 3

J3-11

AUX 2 COR C

2-LVL/4-LVL SEL

GPDO2 O/P

GPIO 12

Alarm 4

J3-12

AUX 2 COR E

EXT CLOCK

GPDO3 O/P

GPIO 13

Alarm 5

J3-13

AUX 1 PTT A

BAL AUDIO 2

GPDI0 I/P

GPIO 14

Alarm 6

J3-14

AUX 1 PTT K

4-LVL DATA

GPDI1 I/P

GPIO 15

Alarm 7

J3-15

AUX 2 PTT A

BAL AUDIO 1

GPDI2 I/P

GPIO 16

Alarm 8

J3-16

AUX 2 PTT K

2-LVL DATA

GPDI3 I/P

GPIO 17

Tx A Audio Cntl

J5-1

N/C*

AUX 2 AUDIO O/P 1

TX A A/D MODE CTRL

GPAO0 O/P

GPIO 18

Tx B Audio Cntl

J5-9

N/C**

AUX 2 AUDIO O/P 2 TX B A/D MODE CTRL

GPAO1 O/P

GPIO 19

Rx A Sql Flat Aud

J6-3

N/C

GPIO 20 Rx B Sql Flat Aud J6-10

N/C

GPIO 21

N/A

J6-13

N/C

RX B MODE I/P

GPIO 22

N/A

J6-15

N/C

GPIO 23

IMC 3

J6-16

N/C

EXT RPT DISABLE

N/C

* Install SR-39-1 motherboard jumper JU6 for TX A A/D MODE I/P
** Install SR-39-1 motherboard jumper JU7 for TX B A/D MODE I/P.
*** REF FAIL ALARM requires SCARB
**** EXT B/W SEL requires custom modification

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN800 Rev 5-0-0

Aug 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN800 A-PNL-AUX96-3 Auxiliary Connector
Table 2: Auxiliary Control Connector Definitions for Transmitter / Receiver Series

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN800 Rev 5-0-0

Connector Name

Pin #

MT-3 Module

MT-4E Module

Tx A Bank Sel

J6-1

TX A STANDBY

TX A BANK A/B SEL

Tx B Bank Sel

J6-8

TX B STANDBY

TX B BANK A/B SEL

Rx A Bank Sel

J6-7

RX A ISO COR K

RX A BANK A/B SEL

Rx B Bank Sel

J6-14

RX B ISO COR K

RX B BANK A/B SEL

Tx A Sec/Clr

J5-5

TX A SUBT I/P 2

TX A SEC/CLR I/P

Tx B Sec/Clr

J5-13

TX B SUBT I/P 2

TX B SEC/CLR I/P

Rx A Sec/Clr

J6-2

RX A AMP AUD

RX A SEC/CLR O/P

Rx B Sec/Clr

J6-9

RX B AMP AUD

RX B SEC/CLR O/P

Rx A Mode

J4-10

RX A PRIOR COR

RX A A/D MODE O/P

Rx B Mode

J4-14

RX B PRIOR COR

RX B A/D MODE O/P

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN800 A-PNL-AUX96-3 Auxiliary Connector

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN800 Rev 5-0-0

Aug 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN811 SM-3 System Regulator
The SM-3 system regulator is a plug-in module which provides voltage regulation, system metering and audio
monitoring for an MT-3 or MT-4 radio system. The SM-3 includes the following features:
• High current +9.5 Vdc voltage regulator with an anti-latchup hysteresis circuit.
• Front panel switch selectable meter outputs to check supply voltages, carrier strengths, etc.
• Audio amplifier and loudspeaker.
• Relay drivers for optional antenna relays.
SYSTEM REGULATOR
FUNCTION

SYSTEM REGULATOR
FUNCTION

10
9
8
+

POWER
ON

METER
-

VOL

POWER
ON

METER

OFF

VOL

ANTENNA A

VOL

FUNCTION

SYSTEM REGULATOR

7
VOL

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

SPKR

MADE IN CANADA

ANTENNA A

ANTENNA B

RX A

RX B

TX A

TX B

METER
-

TX A
ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

RX A

+
METER

OFF

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

SPKR

MADE IN CANADA

There are four different versions of the system regulator.
SM-3-H0-014-00
SM-3-H0-014-01
SM-3-H0-R1N-00
SM-3-H0-R2N-00

Standard SM-3 with no relays or switches (14 HP width)
SM-3 with main power switch (14 HP width)
SM-3 with single antenna relay on the front panel (21 HP width)
SM-3 with dual antenna relays on the front panel (21 HP width)

The System Regulators have a rotary switch on the front panel allowing the various functions to be selected
for monitoring. Two front panel jacks are provided for monitoring of selected functions. An audio amplifier and
loudspeaker allow for audio monitoring. Front panel controls allow for audio volume adjustment. Select the Receiver
audio for monitoring using the rotary switch (position 3 for Receiver A, position 5 for Receiver B), and turn the
speaker ON. An external speaker jack is also available. An LED indicator illuminates when the audio circuits are
on. Receiver C, D and E can also be monitored when using the System Regulator in a Multiple Receiver Subrack.
Jumpers JU15 - JU24 are installed for Multiple Receiver Subrack compatibility.

Backwards Compatibility
The SM-3 System Regulator is a direct replacement for the SM-3 System Monitor, however, the rotary switch
positions for the front panel test points have been changed.
The simplex mode jumpers to connect the Transmitter PTT OUT signal line to the RX MUTE are now located
on the new motherboard, but the System Regulators still contain the simplex mode jumpers for backwards
compatibility with older motherboards.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN811

Rev 3-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN811 SM-3 System Regulator
System Regulator Testing
The System Regulator module is designed with a convenient and easy test point built in to the front panel. This test
point allows a technician access to the DC supply and regulated voltages. Simply connect a standard Digital Volt
Meter (DVM) to the METER jacks on the front panel of the System Regulator as shown in Figure 1. Turn the rotary
switch to the desired position to measure the supply voltage, regulated voltage or audio output as shown in Table 1.
Note that the RSSI requires a carrier and the audio output requires an audio tone injected into the receiver.

SWITCH A
3

SWITCH B

A D

MICMODE

FUNCTION

A D
NORM
OFF
KEY TX
ANALOG
DIGITAL

SQ. DISABLE

NORM
OFF

REF
IN

5
7

TX A
USB

VOL

POWER
ON

METER
-

RX A
CNTL
BUS

DIGITAL MULTIMETER

SYSTEM REGULATOR

FREQUENCY (MHz)

REF
IN

RECEIVER

TRANSMITTER

REPEATER
CONTROL

AutoHOLD

FAST MN MX

HOLD

MIN MAX

OFF

ON
OFF
SPKR
INT
EXT
EXT

RF I N
MIC

RF OUT
CNTL
BUS

RX B

YES

REL
SAVE

RANGE
RANGE

ac+dc
ac+dc

USB

TX B

LOGGING

CANCEL

ms
Hz %
% ms
Hz
SETUP

mV
mV

F
F

C
C

V
V

A
A
mA
mA
A
A

mV
mV

A
A
mA
mA

V
V

ac+dc

A
A

OFF
OFF

ac+dc

VIEW

CLEAR MEM

SPKR

TEMPERATURE

mA
A

COM

PULL DOWN
TO REMOVE
MADE IN CANADA

MADE IN CANADA

MODEL # CODE

MADE IN CANADA

Figure 1: System Regulator Testing

Table 1: System Regulator Rotary Switch Functions
Position

Function

Parameter

Supply Voltage

+10 Vdc to +17 Vdc (+13.8 Vdc nominal)

+9.5 Volts Regulated

+9.5 Vdc (± 0.1 Vdc)

Rx A Audio

Receiver A Audio (NOT Rx Balanced Output)

Rx A Carrier Strength

0 Vdc to +5.0 Vdc based on received signal strength

Rx B Audio

Receiver B Audio (NOT Rx Balanced Output)

Rx B Carrier Strength

0 Vdc to +5.0 Vdc based on received signal strength

Rx C Audio

Receiver C Audio (NOT Rx Balanced Output)

Rx C Carrier Strength

0 Vdc to +5.0 Vdc based on received signal strength

Rx D Audio

Receiver D Audio (NOT Rx Balanced Output)

Rx D Carrier Strength

0 Vdc to +5.0 Vdc based on received signal strength

Rx E Audio

Receiver E Audio (NOT Rx Balanced Output)

Rx E Carrier Strength

0 Vdc to +5.0 Vdc based on received signal strength

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN811

Rev 3-1-0

Mar 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN830 AC to DC and DC to DC Power Supplies
The PSA-4P-1 and PSA-4U-1 AC switching power
supplies provide a regulated +13.8 Vdc to the output
terminals. Valuable rack space has been saved by
mounting the “P” version AC power supply inside
the rear panel frame that attaches to the rear of the
subrack. The “U” version is sold unmounted. An AC
power socket is located on the outside of the subrack
rear panel and accepts standard IEC320 type cordsets.

Input Voltage Range
Input Frequency Range
Output Voltage
Output Current
AC Fuse
Efficiency
Operating Temperature

100–265 Vac Universal
50 / 60 Hz
+13.8 Vdc ± 70 mV
20 Amps continuous
4.0 Amps
90%
-45°C to +50°C (-50°F to +125°F)

Features:
Float Charger and Battery Backup:
A 12V battery terminal connector, conveniently routed to the back of the auxiliary panel for ease of access,
allows connection of a Lead Acid battery for float charging. During a power failure the Lead-Acid battery
provides backup power to the primary output. This terminal is fused protected from excessive current draw
and reverse polarity connections.
Voltage Adjust:
Output voltage may be adjusted slightly by turning an internal potentiometer. The potentiometer may be
accessed through an opening on the top of the lid.
Active Current Limiting:
In the event of a short circuit condition, the output will shut down in order to protect the power supply from
overheating. Once the load is returned to within specification, the output will be reset automatically.
Overvoltage Protection:
The output is limited to a pre-determined voltage level, in the event of a fault condition.
Input Voltage Surge:
The power supply is protected at the input by a transient voltage suppressor, which will limit any unwanted
voltage surges. There is also an inline fuse present at the input for additional safety.
Output Isolation:
A high power schottky diode at the output prevents any unwanted feedback into the power supply from the
load.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN830 Rev 7-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN830 AC to DC and DC to DC Power Supplies

The DC to DC converters provide a regulated +13.8
Vdc to the output terminals over a wide range of DC
input voltages. Valuable rack space has been saved
by mounting the DC to DC converter inside the rear
panel frame that attaches to the rear of the subrack. A
terminal block is located on the outside of the subrack
rear panel for the DC input voltage. The DC to DC
converters comes in two different models.

FRAME

DC - DC CONVERTER
#12 WIRES TO
SUB-RACK
MOTHERBOARD

Input Voltage Range

18 - 36 Vdc floating input PSD-15-08-P0-80
36 - 72 Vdc floating input PSD-15-08-P0-90
Factory set at +15 Vdc. Adjustable from +13.5 Vdc to +16.5 Vdc
12 Amps continuous @ +15 Vdc
-25°C to +85°C
50 mA
±1% max
On: +5.5V min. or open circuit
Off: +1.8V max.
Input to Output: 100 Vdc min.
85%
100°C / ±5°C

Output Voltage
Output Current
Operating Temperature
Input Current No Load
Voltage Accuracy
Remote On / Off Control
Isolation Voltage
Efficiency
Thermal Shut Down
Features:
• remote on/off control
• over voltage protection
• reverse voltage protection
• input surge protection

• short circuit protection specified for an indefinite period
• 100V input to output isolation

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN830 Rev 7-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN835 High Current AC to DC Power Supplies
The PSA-12-40-RB-00 and PSA-12-60-RB-00 AC switching power supplies provide a regulated +13.8 Vdc to the
output terminals. The power supplies are 19” rack mountable and include battery revert capability. An input fuse,
electronic current limiting and voltage limiting protection, transient voltage suppressor and thermistor are built into
the unit as standard protection to safeguard the unit from abnormal conditions. The power supply uses active
current sharing technology to distribute the load current among two or three 20 Amp modules. This reduces stress
on individual components and increases reliability.
For remote sensing, status signals are available on the rear of the power supply on a female DB25 connector.
REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY

SYSTEM STATUS
DC / Output

AC / Input

ON
OFF

Module 1

off

Module 2

off

Module 3

off

Module 4

off

Specifications
Input Voltage Range
Input Frequency Range
Output Voltage
Output Current

120 Vac or 220 Vac (Switch Selectable)
50 / 60 Hz
+13.8 Vdc
40 Amps continuous @ +13.8 Vdc (+60°C) PSA-12-40-RB-00
60 Amps continuous @ +13.8 Vdc (+60°C) PSA-12-60-RB-00
-40°C to +60°C continuous duty

Operating Temperature

Installation
1. Mount the unit to the 19” rack.
2. Select the input voltage by sliding both AC voltage select switches on the rear of the power supply. Be certain that
both switches are on the same voltage setting.
WARNING: Damage to the unit and personal injury might occur if both the AC voltage select switches are
not set on the same voltage setting.
3. Connect the load to the output terminal block connector marked “SYSTEM”, with proper polarities in mind.
Tighten the output terminal block screws to secure the wires.
4. Connect the backup battery (if applicable) to the output terminal block connector marked “BATT”, with proper
polarities in mind. Tighten the output terminal block screws to secure the wires.
5. While the switch is in the OFF position, connect the supplied AC power cord to the AC input socket.
6. Plug the unit into an AC source capable of handling the rated input current (7 Amps or 12 Amps).
7. Turn the AC switch (located on the front panel) to the ON position to operate the unit.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN835 Rev 1-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN835 High Current AC to DC Power Supplies
Battery Backup
During normal operation, the power supply provides all of the necessary power to the output while float charging
the battery that is connected at the battery backup output. In the event that the AC power source is interrupted, the
battery will start to supply power to the load through an isolation diode; however, the load voltage will be 0.4 Vdc
lower than the battery voltage. The power resistors used to float charge the battery limit the charging current to a
value based on a 100Ah deep cycle battery.

Alarm and Status Signals
For remote monitoring, the power supply is equipped with a female DB25 connector (on the rear of the power supply
behind a protective panel) that outputs various alarm and status signals such as:
Pin Number
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7

Pin Description
AC Good signal
+5 Vdc reference signal
No connection
Fan Good signal
No connection
Current signal
Module 1 Good signal

Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14-15

Module 2 Good signal
Module 3 Good signal
Module 4 Good signal
No connection
Temp warning signal
System VOUT Signal
Ground
13

Voltage Out
+15 Vdc if AC Voltage present / 0 Vdc if AC voltage not available
+5 Vdc
N/C
+5 Vdc if both fans are good / 0 Vdc if one or both fans not functioning
N/C
System current out analog signal (0 Vdc ~ +5 Vdc)
+5 Vdc If Module is Good
0 Vdc If Module is not functioning or not present

N/C
+5 Vdc if the temperature inside the unit is over 48°C
+13.8 Vdc
Ground

Figure 1: Pin Layout of the DB25 Connector

LED Status Display
An LED status indicator (located on the front panel) identifies how many modules are connected on the board and
are working. The display also shows the status of the AC input and the DC output signals.
The green LED status indicator will be lit when:
• AC line voltage is preset
• DC output voltage is present
• Module voltage is present
The yellow LED status indicator will be lit when:
• Module is not present in the slot
• Module is not producing any output

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN835 Rev 1-1-0

Mar 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN836 High Current Digital Series AC to DC Power Supplies
The high current digital series power supplies provide 675 Watts (50 Amps @ +13.8 Vdc) or 1350 Watts (100 Amps
@ +13.8 Vdc) of power and are 19” rack mountable in a 1 RU rack mount chassis and include battery backup
capability.
The digital series power supply may include the following features:
• Front panel control of voltage, current limiting (optionally password protected).
• TCP/IP Ethernet connector for remote monitoring and control of power supply via a built-in web server.
• Battery backup and Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) with adjustable setpoints.
• Connect up to 6 power supplies in parallel with load sharing control.
• Form C alarm contacts and remote on/off capability.
• Temperature controlled fans (front to rear airflow).

Specifications
Input Voltage Range
Frequency Range
Output Voltage Range
Continuous Output Current
Operating Temperature Range
Typical Efficiency
Output Ripple

100 to 265 Vac (Automatic)
50 / 60 Hz
+12 Vdc (+11.5 - +15.5 Vdc)
50 Amps or 100 Amps @ +12 Vdc (+60°C)
-20°C to +60°C
90% @ 220 Vac
15mV RMS

Models Available
PSA-12-50-R6-31

50 Amps with Battery Backup and Remote / Alarm Connector
(No Front Panel Display / Control and no Ethernet connector).
50 Amps with Battery Backup, Remote / Alarm Connector, Front Panel
Display / Control and Ethernet connector.
50 Amps with Battery Backup, Remote / Alarm Connector, Front Panel
Display / Control (No Ethernet connector).
100 Amps with Battery Backup, Remote / Alarm Connector, Front Panel
Display / Control and Ethernet connector.
100 Amps with Battery Backup, Remote / Alarm Connector, Front Panel
Display / Control (No Ethernet connector).

PSA-12-50-R5-11
PSA-12-50-R5-12
PSA-12-100-R5-11
PSA-12-100-R5-12

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN836 Rev 3-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN836 High Current Digital Series AC to DC Power Supplies
Installation
1. Mount the unit to the 19” rack.
2. Connect the positive side of the load to the “POS” busbar and the negative side of the load to the “NEG” busbar.
Tighten the busbar hardware to properly secure the wires.
3. Connect the backup battery (if applicable) positive side of the load to the “BAT” busbar, and the negative side of
the load to the “NEG” busbar. Tighten the busbar hardware to properly secure the wires.
4. Connect a chassis bonding wire to the 1/4 inch ground stud located on the back panel (if required).
5. While the switch is in the OFF position, connect the supplied AC power cord to the AC input socket.
6. Plug the unit into an AC source capable of handling the rated input current.
7. Turn the AC switch (located on the front panel) to the ON position to operate the unit.

Front Panel Control
The Front Panel Display allows the following:
• View Input Voltage and Output Current
• View and Control Output Voltage (+11.5 - +15.5 Vdc) and Current Limit (25 A - 106 A)
• Turn the DC Output On or Off
• Set and Clear a password for the front panel control, including a lockout timer (0 - 60 min.)
• View the IP address, MAC address and device name
• Reset the password, IP address and port to factory default
• Configure parallel mode (Master and Slave setting), number of units paralleled, or set as standalone
• Set the LVD disconnect (+10 - +12.4 Vdc) and reconnect voltage (+10.6 - +13.8 Vdc), and view battery voltage

Battery Backup
The “BAT” terminal provides a current limited charge up to the maximum rated output of the supply. When AC
fails, the load is automatically and seamlessly transferred to the battery so that the load is not interrupted. When
AC returns, the power supply picks up the load, and resumes charging the battery to an optimal state of charge.
A built-in Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) protects the battery voltage from dropping too low, thereby avoiding
damage to the battery.

AC Power Cords
The 50 Amp Power supply requires a NEMA 5-15 (15 Amp) socket for the power cord.
The 100 Amp Power supply requires a NEMA 5-20 (20 Amp) socket for the power cord.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN836 Rev 3-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN836 High Current Digital Series AC to DC Power Supplies
Remote Control and Alarm Connector
A REMOTE connector on the back panel of the power supply allows for the following functionality:
Pin Number
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7

Pin Description
REM SD+
REM SDREM SNS+
REM SNSCommon
NO
NC

Functionality
Remote shutdown control lines (TTL compatible)
Hi = output off; Low = output on
Remote voltage sense lines for tighter voltage regulation at load
Default sense point is at busbars
Alarm Output Common
Alarm Output Normally Open contact (0.5 A 125 Vac max.)
Alarm Output Normally Closed contact (0.5 A 125 Vac max.)

Alarms
Alarm Output activation setting is enabled or disabled through the TCP/IP web based utility (for units without the
Ethernet option the form C relay output will always be activated for an alarm condition). Available alarms are as
follows:
DC Output Voltage Failure Alarm
DC Overcurrent Shutdown Alarm
AC Input Voltage Failure Alarm
System Failure Alarm
Over-Temperature Alarm
Parallel Unit Offline Alarm

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN836 Rev 3-0-0

Output voltage rises above ≈ 110% of the maximum rated output.
Alarm latches output off, clears when DC output manually re-enabled.
Output current rises above ≈ 115% of the maximum rated output.
Alarm latches output off, clears when DC output manually re-enabled.
AC Input voltage falls below ≈ 90 Vac.
Alarm latches output off, automatically clears when AC input rises .
above ≈ 100 Vac for 3 seconds.
Internal system failure.
Alarm latches output off, clears when DC output manually re-enabled.
and internal fault is no longer present.
Internal over-temperature limit exceeded.
Alarm latches output off, automatically clears when temperature .
returns to normal operating range.
Communication is lost between parallel units.
Output state unaffected. No effect if parallel operation is not active.

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN836 High Current Digital Series AC to DC Power Supplies
TCP / IP Web Based Utility
The power supplies may be equipped with an embedded Web server that allows status monitoring and changing
of the settings and configuration of the power supply. The embedded Web server provides an interface to the
power supply that can be accessed through a standard web browser on a network connected computer. There is
no additional software to install or configure. If the power supply is connected to a network with a DHCP server, it
will be assigned an IP address automatically.
The web browser connection allows all of the configuration of the front panel (voltage control, current limiting,
monitoring, password control, IP management parallel mode control and LVD setting), as well as Alarm Setup
(independently selecting the alarms to activate the Form C relays and/or send e-mails).
The web browser also has remote reset capability, e-mail configuration, SNMP and other features. An example of
the web browser is shown below.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN836 Rev 3-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN840 Extender Cards and Kits
To facilitate testing, alignment and maintenance for the MT-3 and MT-4 radio systems, extender cards and kits can
be used to extend the individual modules out from the subrack.
Extender cards plug directly into the subrack, and are shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1: EC-96D1 and EC-48RD Extender Cards

Extender kits (extender card and a four foot cable) allow the modules to be extended out to a bench for servicing
as shown in Figure 2.

EXTENDER
CARD
CONNECT TO
MODULE

EXTENDER
CARD
CABLE

TO SUBRACK

Figure 2: Extender Kit

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN840 Rev 4-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN840 Extender Cards and Kits
The following extender cards and kits are available:
EC-48RD Extender Card
Used for all transmitter, receiver and system regulator modules.
Direct connect (no cables).
Extender card and adapter panel extrusion are mounted in the subrack in TX, RX or SM-3 slot.
Adapter panel supports the module outside the subrack and has different slots for each module.
EC-96D1 Extender Card
Used for the 96 pin control cards (AC-3E, CI-RC-4L, CI-BC-4E, UIC-4).
Direct connect (no cables).
Extender card is mounted in the subrack in the control card slot.
Control card is inserted into the red plastic rails on the end of the extender card and is locked into place using
black locking levers.
EC-48RK-1.22 Extender Kit
Used for all transmitter, receiver and system regulator modules.
Extender card and four foot cable.
Extender card and adapter panel extrusion is mounted in the subrack in TX, RX or SM-3 slot and cable is used to
attach to module.
EC-96K-1.22 Extender Kit
Used for the 96 pin control cards (AC-3E, CI-RC-4L, CI-BC-4E, UIC-4).
Extender card and four foot cable.
Extender card is mounted in the subrack in the control card slot and cable is used to attach to module.

Test Points
The extender cards have solder points available on each signal line that can have a small test point (5059-TP110300),
that is supplied with the extender card, soldered to them for easy connection with clip-on type clips.
Recommended Test Points are:
Audio Control Card and Base Control Card Extender Card pins (EC-96D1 and EC-96K-1.22):
Auxiliary 1 Audio Output = B11 & A11
Auxiliary 2 Audio Output = C1 & C3 (Audio Control Card); C2 & C4 (Base Control Card)
Auxiliary 1 Audio Input = C19 & C20
Auxiliary 2 Audio Input = B14 & A14
Receiver and Transmitter Extender Card pins (EC-48RD and EC-48RK-1.22):
Rx Balanced Audio Output = B26 & Z26
Tx Balanced Audio Input = B18 & Z18
Tx Subtone Input = B22 & Ground (B32)

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN840 Rev 4-1-0

Mar 13

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN855 CI-DSP-223 Telex (Vega) DSP Tone-Remote Adapter
The Telex DSP-223 tone-remote adapter provides a reliable means of remotely controlling Codan base stations
and repeaters. The adapters can be used in conjunction with tone-remote control consoles which use the industrystandard sequential tone keying format. The DSP-223 adapters are interconnected to the distant remote control
console(s) by any voice grade transmission medium such as a microwave link, a leased telephone line, or a twistedpair 600-ohm line. All DSP-223 adapters are capable of decoding the PTT tone sequence and the voice-plus-tone
signals during transmission. The tone portion of the voice-plus-tone signal is removed from the transmitted voice.
All models are prepared for jumper-plug conversion from four-wire-line operation to two-wire-line operation. In the
four-wire mode, the panels are full duplex capable.
The Telex DSP-223 tone-remote adapter provides the following features:
• PTT Relay and Monitor Relay
• 99 digit front panel display
• PTT, Monitor and Power LED indicators
• F1 and F2 Relays (programmable to any function tone)
• Digital outputs for channel selection of the Codan Tx and Rx modules (programmable to any function tone)
• CTCSS encode generation (64 frequencies available)
• Hardware and software gain controls
• Local handset port for monitoring activity through the unit and transmission back to the base or to the radio
• Front panel test points and level set pots
• RS-232C port on front panel for software configuration via Windows application
• Ability to pass through to a second tone adapter
• Single or Dual function tone recognition (16 or 100 function tones)
• Morse code encoder for Automatic station identification
• Voter / Ring Down Tone Generation

All models have been factory tuned to the following frequencies:
Guard Tone / PTT Tone: 2175 Hz
Monitor Function Tone: 2050 Hz
Frequency Select Function Tones (where used)
F1: 1950 Hz

F4: 1650 Hz

F7: 1350 Hz

F10: 1050 Hz

F13: 750 Hz

F2: 1850 Hz

F5: 1550 Hz

F8: 1250 Hz

F11: 950 Hz

F14: 650 Hz

F3: 1750 Hz

F6: 1450 Hz

F9: 1150 Hz

F12: 850 Hz

F15: 550 Hz

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

TN855 Rev 11-0-0 Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

F16: 450 Hz

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 6

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN855 CI-DSP-223 Telex (Vega) DSP Tone-Remote Adapter
DB-25 Connector Table (Color coding for Codan Interconnect cables):
1

YEL/GRN (PTT NC)

RED/BLU (DIG4)

YEL/BRN (PTT COM)

VIO/GRN (CTCSS)

WHT/GRY (F2 NC)
WHT/ORG (F2 COM)

YEL/GRY (MON NO)

VIO/BRN (RX-)

WHT/BLU (+POWER)

YEL/ORG (F1 NC)

VIO/GRY (TX-)

BLK/GRN (DIG1)

YEL/BLU (F1 COM)

VIO/ORG (PTT NO)

BLK/BRN (DIG3)

RED/GRN (F2 NO)

VIO/BLU (MON NC)

BLK/GRY (DIG5)

RED/BRN (GND)

WHT/GRN (MON COM)

BLK/ORG (RX+)

RED/GRY (DIG0)

WHT/BRN (F1 NO)

BLK/BLU (TX+)

RED/ORG (DIG2)

Installation:
A female DB25 connector on the back of the subrack (J10) can be used for basic base connections to a Telex
DSP-223, using a standard straight-through male-to-male DB25 cable (CBLC40-04225092). (WARNING: JU108
must be configured correctly or damage can occur. JU108 A for +13.8 Vdc / DSP-223). The A-PNL-AUX96-3
auxiliary connector can also be used to connect to the Telex board to a Codan Base Station with an AC-3E or CIBC-4E, as shown in Figure 1. Select the two or four-wire-line operation and setup jumpers J20 and J21on the Telex.
For four-wire-line operation, set the jumpers in position ‘B’ and connect the four-wire leased line outgoing to Pins 4
and 5 and the receive to Pins 3 and 6 of the RJ45 modular connector. For two-wire-line operation, set the jumpers
in position ‘A’ and connect the two-wire leased line to Pins 4 and 5 of the RJ45 modular connector. Ensure jumpers
JU67A (or JU67X for CI-BC-4E) and JU68 are installed on the AC-3E and CI-BC-4E. On Codan MT-4R and MT-4D
radio systems, the CTCSS to Subtone connection is not connected.
P1 (A-PNL-AUX96-3 CONTROL CONNECTOR)
CODAN RADIO EQUIPMENT
13.8V
GND
(GPIO 5) AUX 1 AUDIO O/P1
(GPIO 6) AUX 1 AUDIO O/P2
(GPIO 1) AUX 1 AUDIO I/P1
(GPIO 2) AUX 1 AUDIO I/P2
(GPIO 14) AUX 1 PTT K
RXA SQUELCH OVERRIDE
TXA SECURE / CLEAR (OPTIONAL)
TXA SUBTONE I/P
TXA CSEL D0
TXA CSEL D1
TXA CSEL D2
TXA CSEL D3

TELEX CI-DSP-223
TONE REMOTE ADAPTER

B2 (J4-5)

+POWER

B32 (J4-1)

GND

B11 (J3-5)

RX+

A11

(J3-6)

C19

(J3-1)

C20

(J3-2)

C13

(J3-14)

C10

(J4-9)

C24

(J5-5)

C22

(J1-4)

C21

(J2-1)

B21
A21

(J2-2)
(J2-3)

C23

(J2-4)

RXTX+
TXPTT NO
(INSTALL JP2)

430 OHM
P/N 1101-2A0431JP

MONITOR NO
(INSTALL JP3)
F1 NO
(INSTALL JP4)
CTCSS
DIG0
DIG1
DIG2
DIG3
2/4 WIRE LINE IN/OUT

2/4 WIRE CONNECTIONS
TO CUSTOMER
EQUIPMENT

2/4 WIRE LINE OUT
4 WIRE LINE IN
4 WIRE LINE IN

Jumpers Required For TXA Channel Select:
TELEX: J16B (+5 V Pullup)
SR-39-1: JU50A, JU51A, JU52A, JU53A, Remove JU48
On older motherboards (Serial # 123125 and earlier)
the jumpers were as follows:
SR-39-1: JU24B, JU25B, JU26B, JU27B, Remove JU41

Jumpers Required For PTT Operation:
TELEX: JP2 Installed

Figure 1: Codan Radio System to Telex DSP-223 connection

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 6

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN855 Rev 11-0-0 Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN855 CI-DSP-223 Telex (Vega) DSP Tone-Remote Adapter
Telex DSP Programming:
The Telex DSP-223 is typically factory programmed for the customers requirements, however, reprogramming of
the Telex can be done with the Telex software contained on the CD that comes with the radio system. Ensure that
the embedded firmware of the Telex is the same version as the software. To determine the embedded firmware
version, turn the Telex on and the words DSP-223 will scroll across the display, then the firmware version will
appear. Connect the PC to the Telex programming port on the front panel of the Telex tone remote adapter using the
cable supplied with the Telex. New software and firmware for the Telex can be downloaded from www.telex.com.
The software shown in Figure 2 is version 2.8 and is programmed for channels 1 through 9 with CTCSS tones of
100.0 Hz on channel 1, 203.5 Hz on channel 2 and no CTCSS on channels 3 through 9. Codan radio systems do
not require the “Set Gains” or “TX Filters” sections to be accessed on the Telex DSP-223 software. The CTCSS
tone is shown as always on, to allowing CTCSS to be transmitted when testing, using the microphone on the
front panel of the transmitter module. On Codan MT-4R and MT-4D P25 radio systems, the CTCSS to Subtone
connection is not connected and CTCSS tones are generated internally in the transmitter.

Figure 2: Telex DSP-223 Programming Software

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

TN855 Rev 11-0-0 Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 6

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN855 CI-DSP-223 Telex (Vega) DSP Tone-Remote Adapter
TELEX

FUNCTION

DSP-223

R
O
LI UN
D
N
E
R TX
AD I
C OT
TC X
S
LI S
N
E
LI RX
N
E
R TX
AD +
I
R OT
AD X
IO +
R
LI X
N
E
TX
LI
N
E
R
X
R
AD
IO
TX
R
AD
IO
R
X
C
TC
SS

HANDSET

PROGRAMMING PORT

POWER

PTT

MONITOR

PTT IC

Telex DSP Alignment / Tuning Procedures:
Initial Setup
Step 1 - Program the Telex using the Telex programming software and ensure all jumpers are correctly installed.

AC-3E Audio Control Card and CI-BC-4E Base Control Card Tuning
Step 2 - Disconnect the Telex tone remote from the Codan radio system.
Step 3 - Apply a 1.0 KHz tone @ 0 dBm (775 mV) to the GPIO 1 (Aux 1 I/P 1) and GPIO 2 (Aux 1 I/P 2) balanced
auxiliary audio input on the Codan radio system.
Step 4 - Adjust R120 (Aux In 1 to TXA) for a transmitter deviation of ± 3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz (NB).
Step 5 - Inject a 1.0 KHz tone @ a deviation of ± 3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz (NB) into Receiver A.
Step 6 - Adjust R13 (RXA to Aux Out 1) for an audio level of 0 dBm (775 mV @ 600 ohms) across GPIO 5 (Aux 1
O/P 1) and GPIO 6 (Aux 1 O/P 2) on the Codan radio system. Note: MT-4R and MT-4D P25 Receiver modules
have a higher audio level output when receiving a digital signal (as opposed to analog). When using these receiver
modules in digital mode, adjust R13 for an audio level of -8.0 dBm (308 mV @ 600 ohms).
Step 7 - Connect the Telex tone remote to the Codan radio system.

Telex Line and Radio Level Tuning
Step 8 - Using an appropriate test set (Telex C-2002), apply a 1.0 KHz tone @ 0 dBm into the tone remote.
Step 9 - On the front panel of the Telex, monitor the receive line level (AC Voltmeter across LINE RX and GROUND)
and adjust the LINE RX pot for 500 mV. This level can vary with the cable length between the console and the
remote.
Step 10 - On the front panel of the Telex, monitor the transmit radio level (AC Voltmeter across RADIO TX+ and
RADIO TX-) and adjust the RADIO TX pot for 0 dBm (775 mV) or a transmitter deviation of ± 3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5
KHz (NB).
Step 11 - Inject a 1.0 KHz tone @ a deviation of ± 3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz (NB) into Receiver A.
Step 12 - On the front panel of the Telex, monitor the receive radio level (AC Voltmeter across RADIO RX and
GROUND) and adjust the RADIO RX pot for 0 dBm (775 mV). Note: When adjusting R13 in Step 6 for an audio
level of -8.0 dBm (308 mV), adjust the RADIO RX pot for -8.0 dBm (308 mV).
Step 13 - On the front panel of the Telex, monitor the transmit line level (AC Voltmeter across LINE TX+ and LINE
TX-) and adjust the LINE TX pot for 0 dBm (775 mV). This level can vary with the cable length between the console
and the remote.
Step 14 - Set the Communications analyzer to monitor the deviation level of the transmitter CTCSS encode tone
(enable 300 Hz Lowpass filter).
Step 15 - Key the Telex test set with a CTCSS tone programmed and adjust the CTCSS pot on the front panel of
the Telex for a transmitter deviation of ± 500 Hz (WB), ± 350 Hz (NB).

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 6

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN855 Rev 11-0-0 Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN855 CI-DSP-223 Telex (Vega) DSP Tone-Remote Adapter
Bypassing the AC-3E Audio Control Card and CI-BC-4E Base Control Card:
The AC-3E Audio Control Card and CI-BC-4E Base Control Card can be bypassed and the MT-4E Receiver
and Transmitter can be connected directly to the Telex adapter. The control card needs to be removed from the
subrack, or unwanted loading could occur.
The following receiver and transmitter tuning changes would be required:
Transmitter Setup - Apply a 1.0 KHz tone @ 0 dBm (775 mV) to the Tx A Bal I/P1 (J1-1) and Tx A Bal I/P 2 (J1-2)
balanced audio input and adjust the RSS software Balanced Audio Deviation Level for a transmitter deviation of ±
3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz (NB).
Receiver Setup - Inject a 1.0 KHz tone @ a deviation of ± 3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz (NB) into the receiver and
adjust the RSS software Balanced Output Audio Level for an audio level of 0 dBm (775 mV @ 600 ohms) across
Rx A Bal O/P 1 (J1-5) and Rx A Bal O/P 2 (J1-6).
The DB25 (J10) can be jumpered for Balanced Audio direct to / from the receiver and transmitter as follows:
JU104
JU105
JU106

A = RX A Bal O/P2
A = TX A Bal I/P2
A = TX A Bal I/P1

JU107
JU108

A = RX A Bal O/P1
A = DSP-223 / +13.8 V

On the Wiring diagram for the A-PNLAUX96-3, the following connections change:
(GPIO 5) AUX 1 AUDIO O/P1(J3-5)
(GPIO 6) AUX 1 AUDIO O/P2 (J3-6)
(GPIO 1) AUX 1 AUDIO I/P1 (J3-1)
(GPIO 2) AUX 1 AUDIO I/P2 (J3-2)
(GPIO 14) AUX 1 PTT K (J3-14)

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Rx A Bal O/P 1 (J1-5)
Rx A Bal O/P 2 (J1-6)
Tx A Bal I/P1 (J1-1)
Tx A Bal I/P 2 (J1-2)
Tx A PTT (J1-3)

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

TN855 Rev 11-0-0 Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 5 of 6

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN855 CI-DSP-223 Telex (Vega) DSP Tone-Remote Adapter

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 6 of 6

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN855 Rev 11-0-0 Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN856 CI-IP-223 Telex (Vega) IP Network Remote Adapter
The Telex IP-223 IP Network remote adapter provides a reliable means of remotely controlling up to two Codan
base stations. The adapter can be used in conjunction with Telex model C-6200, C-Soft, IP-1616, IP-2002 consoles.
The IP-223 is interconnected to the distant remote control console(s) by means of any available Wide Area Network
(WAN) or Local Area Network (LAN) connection.

The Telex CI-IP-223 is capable of operating in several distinct modes:
Local: The radio is connected to the CI-IP-223 directly using a similar connection pin-out as the CI-DSP-223 and is
controlled by Telex VoIP consoles. This mode supports direct serial control of several radio models.
Tone: The CI-IP-223 decodes Ethernet traffic from Telex VoIP consoles and encodes industry standard tones for
control of existing tone remote adapters. This allows a migration path to VoIP communications and keeps legacy
equipment.
Console: The CI-IP-223 decodes industry standard tones from existing legacy consoles and converts it to Ethernet
traffic to another CI-IP-223 that regenerates the industry standard tones for control of existing tone remote
adapters.
Phone: Using the PIB223, a line on the CI-IP-223 is used to connect to a standard PSTN phone service.
Smart Repeater: In this mode, the CI-IP-223 can be made to link two repeaters together. The CI-IP-223’s are
effectively back-to-back on the network.
The Telex IP-223 Network remote adapter provides the following features:
• 2X16 LCD backlit Display
• PTT, Monitor and Power LED indications
• PTT, Monitor, F1 and F2 Relays (programmable to any function tone or Revert to F1)
• Two PTT modes and three monitor modes
• Eight selectable PTT frequencies
• Seven digital outputs for channel selection, completely programmable per function tone
• CTCSS generation (64 frequencies)
• Hardware and software gain control
• Local handset port for monitoring activity and transmission back to base or to radio
• Front panel test points and level set potentiometers
• RS-232C port on rear for initial configuration and direct radio control
• Single function tone recognition (16 function tones)
• Automatic Gain Control
• Function tone lock-out
• RX Audio Squelch
• Crosspatch capability
• ANI Over the Air - Decode and Display

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN856 Rev 7-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN856 CI-IP-223 Telex (Vega) IP Network Remote Adapter
DB-25 Connector Table (Color coding for Codan Interconnect cables):
1

YEL/GRN (PTT NC)

RED/BLU (DIG4)

WHT/GRY (F2 NC)

YEL/BRN (PTT COM)

VIO/GRN (CTCSS)

WHT/ORG (F2 COM)

YEL/GRY (MON NO)

VIO/BRN (RX-)

WHT/BLU (DIG6/COR)

YEL/ORG (F1 NC)

VIO/GRY (TX-)

BLK/GRN (DIG1)

YEL/BLU (F1 COM)

VIO/ORG (PTT NO)

BLK/BRN (DIG3)

RED/GRN (F2 NO)

VIO/BLU (MON NC)

BLK/GRY (DIG5)

RED/BRN (GND)

WHT/GRN (MON COM)

BLK/ORG (RX+)

RED/GRY (DIG0)

WHT/BRN (F1 NO)

BLK/BLU (TX+)

RED/ORG (DIG2)

Installation:
A female DB25 connector on the back of the subrack (J10) can be used for basic base connections to a Telex IP223, using a standard straight-through male-to-male DB25 cable (CBLC40-04225092) (WARNING: JU108 must
be configured correctly or damage can occur. JU108 B for Rx A COR / IP-223). The IP-223 also requires that
2 pins on the DB25 (PTT COM - pin2 and MON COM - pin 16) are wired to ground for proper operation. The A-PNLAUX96-3 auxiliary connector can also be used to connect to the Telex board to a Codan Base Station with an AC-3E
or CI-BC-4E, as shown in Figure 1. Ensure jumpers JU67A (or JU67X for CI-BC-4E) and JU68 are installed on the
AC-3E and CI-BC-4E. On Codan MT-4R and MT-4D P25 radio systems, the CTCSS to Subtone connection is not
connected.
P1 (A-PNL-AUX96-3 CONTROL CONNECTOR)
CODAN RADIO EQUIPMENT
TXA SECURE / CLEAR (OPTIONAL)
RX A COR
(GPIO 5) AUX 1 AUDIO O/P1
(GPIO 6) AUX 1 AUDIO O/P2
(GPIO 1) AUX 1 AUDIO I/P1
(GPIO 2) AUX 1 AUDIO I/P2
(GPIO 14) AUX 1 PTT K
RXA SQUELCH OVERRIDE
TXA SUBTONE I/P
TXA CSEL D0
TXA CSEL D1
TXA CSEL D2
TXA CSEL D3
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

TELEX CI-IP-223
NETWORK REMOTE ADAPTER

C24 (J5-5)
B8

F1 NO

(J1-7)

COR (DIG 6)

B11 (J3-5)

RX+

A11 (J3-6)

RX-

C19 (J3-1)

TX+

C20 (J3-2)

TX-

C13 (J3-14)

PTT NO

C10 (J4-9)

MONITOR NO

C22 (J1-4)

CTCSS

C21 (J2-1)
B21 (J2-2)
A21 (J2-3)
C23 (J2-4)

DIG0
DIG1
DIG2
DIG3

A32, B32 (J4-1)

GND

A32, B32 (J4-2)

PTT COM

A32, B32 (J4-3)

F1 COM

A32, B32 (J4-4)

MON COM

(CONNECTOR J8) +13.8V

+12V

GND

Jumpers Required For TXA Channel Select:
TELEX: J8A (+5 V Pullup)
SR-39-1: JU50A, JU51A, JU52A, JU53A, Remove JU48
On older motherboards (Serial # 123125 and earlier)
the jumpers were as follows:
SR-39-1: JU24B, JU25B, JU26B, JU27B, Remove JU41

Figure 1: Codan Radio System to Telex IP-223 connection

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN856 Rev 7-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN856 CI-IP-223 Telex (Vega) IP Network Remote Adapter
IP-223
X

HANDSET

GND
TX
TX+
TX

TX
+
TX
TX
R
X

TELEX

LINE

TX
LNK

RADIO 1

RADIO 2

Telex IP Alignment / Tuning Procedures:
Initial Setup
Step 1 - Program the Telex and ensure all jumpers are correctly installed.

AC-3E Audio Control Card and CI-BC-4E Base Control Card Tuning
Step 2 - Disconnect the Telex from the Codan radio system.
Step 3 - Apply a 1.0 KHz tone @ 0 dBm (775 mV) to the GPIO 1 (Aux1 I/P 1) and GPIO 2 (Aux1 I/P 2) balanced
auxiliary audio input on the Codan radio system.
Step 4 - Adjust R120 (Aux In 1 to TXA) for a transmitter deviation of ± 3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz (NB).
Step 5 - Inject a 1.0 KHz tone @ a deviation of ± 3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz (NB) into Receiver A.
Step 6 - Adjust R13 (RXA to Aux Out 1) for an audio level of 0 dBm (775 mV @ 600 ohms) across GPIO 5 (Aux 1
O/P 1) and GPIO 6 (Aux 1 O/P 2) on the Codan radio system. Note: MT-4R and MT-4D P25 Receiver modules
have a higher audio level output when receiving a digital signal (as opposed to analog). When using these receiver
modules in digital mode, adjust R13 for an audio level of -8.0 dBm (308 mV @ 600 ohms).
Step 7 - Connect the Telex to the Codan radio system.

Vega Line and Radio Level Tuning
Step 8 - Press and hold the LINE button on the front of the Telex and triple click the IC button so that “VU1 -50db /
VU2 -50db” is displayed on the LCD display.
Step 9 - Inject a 1.0 KHz tone @ a deviation of ± 3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz (NB) into Receiver A.
Step 10 - Adjust the RX pot until VU1 reads 0.0 db.
Step 11 - Press and hold the LINE button on the front of the Telex and click the IC button to return to normal
operation.
Step 12 - Press and hold the LINE button on the front of the Telex and double click the IC button so that “Tx Align”
is displayed on the LCD display.
Step 13 - Key the Codan transmitter and adjust the TX pot for a transmitter deviation of ± 3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz
(NB).
Step 14 - Press and hold the LINE button on the front of the Telex and double click the IC button to return to normal
operation.
Step 15 - Set the Communications analyzer to monitor the deviation level of the transmitter CTCSS encode tone
(enable 300 Hz Lowpass filter).
Step 16 - Key the Telex test set with a CTCSS tone programmed and adjust the CTCSS LINE 1 pot on the top of
the Telex for a transmitter deviation of ± 500 Hz (WB), ± 350 Hz (NB).

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN856 Rev 7-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN856 CI-IP-223 Telex (Vega) IP Network Remote Adapter
Bypassing the AC-3E Audio Control Card and CI-BC-4E Base Control Card:
The AC-3E Audio Control Card and CI-BC-4E Base Control Card can be bypassed and the MT-4E Receiver
and Transmitter can be connected directly to the Telex adapter. The control card needs to be removed from the
subrack, or unwanted loading could occur.
The following receiver and transmitter tuning changes would be required:
Transmitter Setup - Apply a 1.0 KHz tone @ 0 dBm (775 mV) to the Tx A Bal I/P1 (J1-1) and Tx A Bal I/P 2 (J1-2)
balanced audio input and adjust the RSS software Balanced Audio Deviation Level for a transmitter deviation of ±
3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz (NB).
Receiver Setup - Inject a 1.0 KHz tone @ a deviation of ± 3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz (NB) into the receiver and
adjust the RSS software Balanced Output Audio Level for an audio level of 0 dBm (775 mV @ 600 ohms) across
Rx A Bal O/P 1 (J1-5) and Rx A Bal O/P 2 (J1-6).
The DB25 (J10) can be jumpered for Balanced Audio direct to / from the receiver and transmitter as follows:
WARNING: JU108 must be configured correctly for IP-223 or damage can occur.
JU104
JU105
JU106

A = RX A Bal O/P2
A = TX A Bal I/P2
A = TX A Bal I/P1

JU107
JU108

A = RX A Bal O/P1
B = IP-223 & IP-224 / RX A COR

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 4

Rx A Bal O/P 1 (J1-5)
Rx A Bal O/P 2 (J1-6)
Tx A Bal I/P1 (J1-1)
Tx A Bal I/P 2 (J1-2)
Tx A PTT (J1-3)

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN856 Rev 7-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN857 CI-IP-ADAPTER-1 Telex (Vega) IP-224 Ethernet Adapter
The Telex IP-224 Ethernet Adapter provides a reliable means of remotely controlling up to two Codan base stations
remotely. The adapter can be used in conjunction with Telex model C-6200, C-Soft, IP-1616, IP-2002 consoles. The
IP-223 is interconnected to the distant remote control console(s) by means of any available Wide Area Network
(WAN) or Local Area Network (LAN) connection.
The IP-224 can be configured to operate in modes that allow it to connect to both digital and analog radios, and
perform a variety of other tasks related to using radios on a digital network. The IP-224 can be rack mounted
providing easy installation and service. A sleek LCD display provides user feedback when programming. VU meters
are provided on the front of the display for alignment purposes. All other configurations are completed in the web
browser configuration windows.

The Telex IP-224 Ethernet Adapter provides the following features:
Ethernet TX and LINK LEDs
PTT (Push To Talk) Monitor, F1 and F2 relays
Four (4) PTT Modes and Three (3) Monitor Modes
Nine (9) Selectable PTT Frequencies
Seven (7) Digital Outputs for Channel Selection
CTCSS (Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System) Generation(64 frequencies)
Software Gain Control
Direct Radio Control
Handset Port for Monitoring Activity and Transmission
Single Function Tone Recognition (16 Function Tones)
AGC (Automatic Gain Control)
RX (Receive) Audio Squelch
ANI (Automatic Number Identification) Over-the-Air Protocol
Up to 1000 function tones supported
MDC1 and FleetSync1 Encode/Decode
SOIP (Serial Over Internet Protocol)
Dual Ethernet Interface for Backup Solution
Supports RS485, CAN Bus, RS232 and TTL
Backwards Compatible with Telex Radio Dispatch Products
Secure Remote Web Browser Programming and Configuration
Single or Dual Function Tone Generation
Guard Tone User-Selectable for 2100Hz, 2175Hz, 2300Hz, 2325Hz,2400Hz, 2600Hz, 2800Hz, 2850Hz or 2900 Hz
Menu Driven Front Panel Control for TX, RX, Spare Audio, and CTCSS

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN857 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN857 CI-IP-ADAPTER-1 Telex (Vega) IP-224 Ethernet Adapter
Installation:
A female DB25 connector on the back of the subrack (J10) can be used for basic base connections to a Telex
IP-224, using a standard straight-through male-to-male DB25 cable and a female DB25 to male DB37 adapter as
follows:
CBLC40-04225092
CBLC46-TELEX-ADPTR

straight-through male-to-male DB25 cable
female DB25 to male DB37 adapter

WARNING: JU108 must be configured correctly or damage can occur. JU108 B for Rx A COR / IP-224. The
IP-224 also requires that 2 pins on the DB25 (PTT COM - pin2 and MON COM - pin 16) are wired to ground for
proper operation. The A-PNL-AUX96-3 auxiliary connector can also be used to connect to the Telex board to a
Codan Base Station with an AC-3E or CI-BC-4E, as shown in Figure 1. Ensure jumpers JU67A (or JU67X for CIBC-4E) and JU68 are installed on the AC-3E and CI-BC-4E. On Codan MT-4R and MT-4D P25 radio systems, the
CTCSS to Subtone connection is not connected.
P1 (A-PNL-AUX96-3 CONTROL CONNECTOR)
CODAN RADIO EQUIPMENT
TXA SECURE / CLEAR (OPTIONAL)
RX A COR
(GPIO 5) AUX 1 AUDIO O/P1
(GPIO 6) AUX 1 AUDIO O/P2
(GPIO 1) AUX 1 AUDIO I/P1
(GPIO 2) AUX 1 AUDIO I/P2
(GPIO 14) AUX 1 PTT K
RXA SQUELCH OVERRIDE
TXA SUBTONE I/P
TXA CSEL D0
TXA CSEL D1
TXA CSEL D2
TXA CSEL D3
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND

TELEX IP-224
ETHERNET REMOTE ADAPTER

C24 (J5-5)
B8

F1 NO

(J1-7)

COR (DIG 6)

B11 (J3-5)

RX+

A11 (J3-6)

RX-

C19 (J3-1)

TX+

C20 (J3-2)

TX-

C13 (J3-14)

PTT NO

C10 (J4-9)

MONITOR NO

C22 (J1-4)

CTCSS

C21 (J2-1)
B21 (J2-2)
A21 (J2-3)
C23 (J2-4)

DIG0
DIG1
DIG2
DIG3

A32, B32 (J4-1)

GND

A32, B32 (J4-2)

PTT COM

A32, B32 (J4-3)

F1 COM

A32, B32 (J4-4)

MON COM

(CONNECTOR J8) +13.8V

+12V

GND

Jumpers Required For TXA Channel Select:
SR-39-1: JU50A, JU51A, JU52A, JU53A, Remove JU48
On older motherboards (Serial # 123125 and earlier)
the jumpers were as follows:
SR-39-1: JU24B, JU25B, JU26B, JU27B, Remove JU41

Figure 1: Codan Radio System to Telex IP-224 connection

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 4

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN857 Rev 1-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN857 CI-IP-ADAPTER-1 Telex (Vega) IP-224 Ethernet Adapter
TELEX

IP-224
MENU

IC
RADIO 1

RADIO 2

HANDSET

USB

LINK

RADIO 1
+12V

GND

EGND

POWER

ETHERNET

PRIM

ACCESORY

RADIO 2

SECOND

Telex IP Alignment / Tuning Procedures:
Initial Setup
Step 1 - Program the Telex IP-224 for your system. Codan makes the following changes from default:
- Ethernet Setup: IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway
- Multicast Setup: Set RX Mcast, TX Mcast and Mcast address at 224.0.0.13
- Per Line Setup: CTCSS Setup Always On, Digital Outputs set from 0 up, COR Enable, Hi-Pass RX, and PTT
Notch Filter selected, Monitor Relay set to Timed 1000 ms.

Telex Line and Radio Level Tuning
Step 8 - Inject a 1.0 KHz tone @ a deviation of ± 3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz (NB) into Receiver A.
Step 9 - On the front of the Telex, go to Gain Adjustments - RX Inputs and adjust Line #1 (dB) until VU reads +0dB.
Step 10 - On the front of the Telex, go to Gain Adjustments - TX Outputs and select Tone as well as PTT. This will
key the Transmitter
Step 11 - Adjust Line #1 (dB) for a transmitter deviation of ± 3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz (NB).
Step 12 - Ensure the transmitter is de-keyed by unselecting the Tone and PTT.
Step 13 - On the front of the Telex, go to System Utilities - Reboot IP-224 and reboot the IP-224.
Step 14 - Connect a console and test the connection.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN857 Rev 1-0-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Aug 16

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 3 of 4

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-4 Radio Systems
TN857 CI-IP-ADAPTER-1 Telex (Vega) IP-224 Ethernet Adapter
Bypassing the AC-3E Audio Control Card and CI-BC-4E Base Control Card:
The AC-3E Audio Control Card and CI-BC-4E Base Control Card can be bypassed and the MT-4E Receiver
and Transmitter can be connected directly to the Telex adapter. The control card needs to be removed from the
subrack, or unwanted loading could occur.
The following receiver and transmitter tuning changes would be required:
Transmitter Setup - Apply a 1.0 KHz tone @ 0 dBm (775 mV) to the Tx A Bal I/P1 (J1-1) and Tx A Bal I/P 2 (J1-2)
balanced audio input and adjust the RSS software Balanced Audio Deviation Level for a transmitter deviation of ±
3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz (NB).
Receiver Setup - Inject a 1.0 KHz tone @ a deviation of ± 3 KHz (WB), ± 1.5 KHz (NB) into the receiver and
adjust the RSS software Balanced Output Audio Level for an audio level of 0 dBm (775 mV @ 600 ohms) across
Rx A Bal O/P 1 (J1-5) and Rx A Bal O/P 2 (J1-6).
The DB25 (J10) can be jumpered for Balanced Audio direct to / from the receiver and transmitter as follows:
WARNING: JU108 must be configured correctly for IP-224 or damage can occur.
JU104
JU105
JU106

A = RX A Bal O/P2
A = TX A Bal I/P2
A = TX A Bal I/P1

JU107
JU108

A = RX A Bal O/P1
B = IP-223 & IP-224 / RX A COR

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 4 of 4

Rx A Bal O/P 1 (J1-5)
Rx A Bal O/P 2 (J1-6)
Tx A Bal I/P1 (J1-1)
Tx A Bal I/P 2 (J1-2)
Tx A PTT (J1-3)

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN857 Rev 1-0-0

Aug 16

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN870 CI-RSWITCH Redundant Switch
The CI-RSWITCH is a low current, high reliability redundant switch capable of operating at extreme temperatures in
remote locations. The CI-RSWITCH Redundant Switch Module provides a simple interface between two redundant
radio systems composed of Codan receivers, transmitters, amplifiers and controllers.
The Redundant Switch Module allows the Main or Backup radio system to be selected for operation and can be
connected to various alarm modules such as the Power Monitors to control the switching function. The Redundant
Switch transfers voltage inputs between the Main and Backup systems, and connections to two high quality RF
relays are provided to permit the two redundant radio systems to share single antenna systems. The Redundant
Switch is 19” rack mounted (1 RU height) and provides DC power to the selected Main and Backup repeater
systems.
The Redundant Switch provides the following features:
• average current draw of 19 mA .
• RF relay switching current of 200 mA for 15 ms maximum.
• input current distribution of up to 40 Amps.
• six active low momentary Alarm inputs.
• two active low momentary Reset inputs.
• one active low Backup Test enable input for testing / tuning purposes.
• two open collector Alarm outputs. Alarm 1 will short to ground to indicate Main operation and Alarm 2 will short to
ground on Backup operation.
RF Relays, Backup Test switch, Main / Backup Indicator LEDs and the System Reset switch are all located on the
front panel of the Redundant Switch as shown in Figure 1.
REDUNDANT SWITCH

Status
Indicators

Primary
Power

System
Reset

Backup
Test

Backup A

Output A

Main A

Backup B

Output B

Main B

ON
Main

OFF

Backup

Figure 1: Redundant Switch Front Panel

Power connections, alarm inputs, reset inputs, backup test input and alarm outputs are all located on the back panel
of the Redundant Switch as shown in Figure 2.
Power Input

(+13.8 Nominal)

Main

Backup

Power O/P

J1 Monitor & Control

Input Range
(12.0V to 17.0V DC)

Figure 2: Redundant Switch Rear Panel

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

TN870 Rev 2-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

TECHNICAL NOTES
MT-3/4 Radio Systems
TN870 CI-RSWITCH Redundant Switch

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

TN870 Rev 2-1-0

Mar 13

EXPLANATORY NOTES

EN100 Quality Management System
Codan Radio Communications (Victoria, BC, Canada) is very proud that our Quality Management System has
been registered to the ISO international quality standard since October 1993. Our Quality Management System is
currently registered to the expanded ISO 9001:2008 standard, and is part of our commitment to provide high quality
products and services to our customers.

Why does Codan use a Quality Management System?
Codan Radio Communications is committed to maintaining and improving its Quality Management System:
for the benefit of the company, to:
* develop and manufacture reliable, specialized radio communications equipment
* attain and consistently maintain the desired quality at optimum cost
* plan and efficiently utilize technological, human and material resources available to the company, to maximize
the quality of our products and service
* comply with any customer requirements or expectations that their suppliers have an ISO-registered Quality
Management System
for the benefit of the customer, to:
* instill confidence in our ability to deliver the desired quality of product and service
* reliably maintain the desired level of quality and performance

What are the principles of a Quality Management System?
The ISO9001:2008 international quality standard is based on eight (8) quality management principles:
* Customer focus
* Leadership
* Involvement of people
* Process approach
* System approach to management
* Continual improvement
*Factual approach to decision making
*Mutually beneficial supplier relationships
By adopting these principles within its Quality Management System, management can lead their organization
towards improved performance, products, services and customer satisfaction.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

EN100 Rev 3-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

EXPLANATORY NOTES

EN100 Quality Management System
What is a process approach?
The “process approach” refers to the definition, implementation and management of interrelating and interacting
activities. Each process is defined by its inputs, activities, decision points and outputs, to ensure adequate control
and consistency of performance. Each process has associated resource, communication and record requirements.
The advantage of the process approach is the control it provides over the links and interactions between related
processes (e.g., the selling and manufacturing of radio systems).

What is the Codan Quality Management System?
The Codan Quality Management System defines processes for the design, development, marketing, sales,
manufacture, testing, configuring and servicing of radio equipment. It also includes supporting processes for
resource management, document and record control, measurement and analysis of data, nonconformance
correction, corrective and preventive actions, internal quality audits, quality management review, and a commitment
to continual improvement.

What does it all mean to our customer?
Our customers require highly reliable radio products with specifications and performance that will meet or exceed
their expectations. The Codan Quality Management System allows us to analyze customer requirements, define
the best process to meet those requirements, and keep those processes under control. It also provides a framework
for continual improvement of our products and services, with a goal to improving customer satisfaction. Codan is
committed to continually expanding and improving our product line to meet the needs of our customers.
Through our Quality Management System, we are better able to provide the high quality products and services our
customers have come to expect.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

EN100 Rev 3-1-0

Mar 13

EXPLANATORY NOTES

EN110 Equipment Calibration and Reference
As a high quality radio communications manufacturer, Codan Radio Communications uses a wide variety of electronic
and mechanical test equipment in the production, design, service and support of our radio communications systems.
Codan test equipment is calibrated annually or semi-annually to ensure it is operating at a proper performance level
and is capable of the high reliability and high performance required by the customer. Codan Radio Communications
files calibration and maintenance records of all test equipment used in our factory and continuously updates these
records to reliably control and record calibration of all equipment.
Codan Radio Communications calibrates all:
Communications Analyzers and Test Sets
Frequency Counters
Spectrum Analyzers
Power Supplies
Torque Wrenches
Digital and Vernier Calipers
Oscilloscopes
Temperature Probes and Sensors

Multimeters
Signal Generators
SINAD meters
Wattmeters
Soldering Stations
Environmental Chambers
ESD Equipment
Internal Test Jigs

and all other equipment used in the design and manufacture of Codan radio equipment.
The accuracy of Codan equipment has been determined by comparison to Standards which are directly traceable to
the Canadian Institute for National Measurement Standards (NRC-INMS) or the US National Institute of Standards
and Technology (NIST).
Codan uses two Spectracom model 8194 oven stabilized frequency references to provide a highly accurate frequency
reference for the purpose of phase locking the internal oscillators of radio production test equipment factory wide.
The outputs of the Spectracom frequency references are locked to the United States Naval Observatory via the
NAVSTAR Global Positioning System (GPS).

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

EN110

Rev 3-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

EXPLANATORY NOTES

EN110 Equipment Calibration and Reference
This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

EN110

Rev 3-1-0

Mar 13

EXPLANATORY NOTES

EN120 Equipment Soldering and ESD Procedures
Soldering
Codan Radio Communications follows industry guidelines for electronic assembly manufacture and trains all
employees engaged in hand soldering, inspection and testing, rework and repair of our product line to meet the
requirements of Codan acceptable manufacturing procedures.
Codan Radio Communications requires all printed circuit assemblies manufatured or sold by Codan to meet
IPC-A-610, Class 2 (Acceptability for Electronic Assemblies) acceptance criteria. IPC (Association Connecting
Electronics Industries) standards and publications have been developed by representatives of the electronics
manufacturing industry and are designed to serve the public interest through eliminating misunderstandings
between manufacturers and customers. IPC-A-610, Class 2 (Dedicated Service Electronic Components) includes
communications equipment where high performance and extended life is required and for which uninterrupted
service is desired.
By training our employees to meet these high quality soldering, ESD, and general workmanship standards, Codan
ensures product reliability, eliminates the causes of defective soldering joints, and minimizes our production and
servicing costs.
Certification in Codan hand soldering and rework program is required by all employees engaged in those aspects of
product manufacture. Individual workmanship is reviewed on an ongoing basis, and re-certification may be required
at any time. This soldering course is approximately one week in length and requires exceptional performance from
the trainees to pass.

ESD
Static Electricity can damage electronic equipment, causing it to stop functioning immediately, or degrading it, leading
to breakdown later. Codan Radio Communications policy requires that all employees use ESD safe practices when
handling electronic components, and all employees attend ESD training of the acceptable procedures for handling
of products in various stages of assembly at Codan.
Static sensitive parts are handled in ESD safe areas by employees grounded with wrist and/or two heel straps and
employees working at workstations wear grounded wrist straps at all times. Codan also requires that all production/
design and development personnel test their wrist straps and/or heel/foot straps at the start of every workday.
All ESD safe areas within the company use ESD safe workstations and static dissipative flooring. All workstations in
the factory have a dissipative hard laminate surface and a common point ground where all conductive components
of the workstation are connected. ESD hazards such as plastic cups, pens, bags, and other similar static generating
items are kept well away from static sensitive devices. Transferring of ESD sensitive components to or from
different areas of the company is conducted in ESD safe bags, tote boxes or carts.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

EN120 Rev 2-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

EXPLANATORY NOTES

EN120 Equipment Soldering and ESD Procedures
This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

EN120 Rev 2-1-0

Mar 13

EXPLANATORY NOTES

EN130 Atacama Large Millimeter Array (ALMA)
What is ALMA?
The Atacama Large Millimeter Array (ALMA) will be one of astronomy’s most powerful telescopes, providing
unprecedented imaging capabilities and sensitivity many orders of magnitude greater than anything of its kind
today.
ALMA will be an array of 66 radio antennas that will work together as one telescope to study millimetre- and
submillimetre-wavelength electromagnetic waves from space. These wavelengths, which cross the critical boundary
between infrared and microwave radiation, hold the key to understanding such processes as planet and star
formation, the formation of early galaxies and galaxy clusters, and the formation of organic and other molecules in
space.
A specialized computer, called a correlator – running at 16,000 million-million operations per second – will combine
all of the data from the 66 antennas to make images of remarkable quality. The configuration of the 66 antennas will
be variable, providing a sort of zoom capability. In its largest configuration, the image detail provided by the array
will be comparable to that which a single radio telescope 14 km in diameter would provide.
Since atmospheric water vapour absorbs millimetre waves, ALMA will need to be constructed in a very dry area,
preferably at a very high altitude. Extensive tests showed that the sky above the Atacama Desert of Chile has the
unsurpassed clarity and stability essential for ALMA. That is why ALMA will be built in the Chilean Andes at 5,000
metres (16,500 feet) elevation.

View south from Cerro Chajnantor, Chile, of ALMA site.
Image courtesy of NRAO/AUI

An international partnership between North America and Europe funds
and operates ALMA. The National Research Council of Canada has
joined with the U.S. National Radio Astronomy Observatory to form the
North American partnership, which is the largest ground-based astronomy
endeavour ever undertaken.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

EN130 Rev 2-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

EXPLANATORY NOTES

EN130 Atacama Large Millimeter Array (ALMA)
ALMA’s ability to detect remarkably faint millimetre emission and to create highly detailed images of the sources
of that emission, will give it capabilities not found in any other astronomical instrument. ALMA will therefore be
able to observe phenomena previously out of reach to astronomers and astrophysicists. These capabilities include
studying:
• The formation of galaxies (eg. the Milky Way) at the earliest times in cosmic history
• New planets forming around young stars in our galaxy
• The birth of new stars in spinning clouds of gas and dust
• The evolutionary stages of aging stars as they shed their outer atmospheres on the way to becoming white dwarfs
• Interstellar clouds of gas and dust that are chemical factories forming complex molecules and organic chemicals related to the building blocks of life.

Artist’s conception of the antennas and compact array for the Atacama Large Millimeter Array
Image courtesy of NRAO/AUI and ESO

Codan and ALMA
The millimetre instrumentation laboratory of the National Research Council of Canada’s
Herzberg Institute of Astrophysics in Victoria, BC, is one of the few facilities in the
world with expertise in superconducting detector technology for millimetre waves. This
technology employs tiny switches about 50 times smaller than the width of a human
hair, operating at liquid helium temperatures of -269 °C (just a few degrees above
absolute zero, -273 °C) to detect and amplify the incredibly faint whispers of radiation
that reach earth from the remotest parts of the cosmos. The physics of very cold
temperatures implies that random noise in electronics circuits virtually disappears.
This means that the receiver can detect very faint signals without interference.
Canada will supply 73 receivers (1 for each antenna and 7 spares) of unprecedented
sensitivity for the 3-millimetre wavelength band - the ALMA Band 3 Receivers. Codan
was contracted by the National Research Council of Canada’s Herzberg Institute
of Astrophysic to build portions of the 84 - 116 GHz ALMA Band 3 Receivers and
completed the contract on March 31, 2011. Codan built a clean room that meets
requirements for ISO Class 7 standards and MIL-STD-1686 static control standards.
Complete Receiver Assembly

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

EN130 Rev 2-1-0

Mar 13

EXPLANATORY NOTES

EN140 Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
RoHS Directive
In order to expand sales into the European market, Codan Radio Communications is currently implementing the
RoHS directive for some key products. The Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) directive—also known by
its legislation number, Directive 2002/95/EC—is an important piece of European Legislation that must be complied
with in order to sell electronic equipment in the European Union (EU).
The RoHS directive took effect in EU member states in July of 2006 and restricts use of the following substances to
a specific maximum concentration value :
LEAD (0.1%) – Solder, brass alloys, and in electronic component lead plating
MERCURY (0.1%) – found in sensitive switches, thermostats
CADMIUM (0.01%) – used in some plastics, PVC, as well as some pigments
HEXAVALENT CHROMIUM (0.1%) – most commonly found in metal finishes
POLYBROMINATED BIPHENYLS or PBB (0.1%) – flame retardants
POLYBROMINATED DIPHENYL ETHERS or PBDE (0.1%) – flame retardants
These maximum concentration values are determined by a percentage of the weight of a “homogenous material”.
Homogenous material is defined by the directive as “a material that cannot be mechanically disjointed into different
material.” This includes anything that is of a uniform composition like a metallic alloy, plastics, resins and coatings.
Every mechanically separate item inside a product must comply separately to the RoHS directive .

Codan and RoHS
All products, accessories and other items sold by Codan in the European market (including product, storage racks,
containers, hardware and labels) will comply with the RoHS directive.
Codan is in the process of moving the manufacturing of all printed circuit boards (PCBs) to lead-free solder and
ensuring that components of select products are certified as RoHS compliant. Codan PCBs that are RoHS compliant
have board numbers beginning with 6- and will also bear the following RoHS logo if room on the board is available.

As future products are released, they will clearly show the RoHS logo to indicate that
the entire unit is 100% RoHS compliant.

The primary difference between the solder connections created with lead-free solder and tin-lead solder is the visual
appearance of the solder. Lead-free solder is more likely to have a grainy or dull appearance as opposed to tin-lead
solder which has a generally smooth appearance.

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

EN140 Rev 1-1-0

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

Mar 13

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

Page 1 of 2

EXPLANATORY NOTES

EN140 Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
This Page Intentionally Left Blank

43 Erie Street
Victoria, B.C.
Canada V8V 1P8

Page 2 of 2

Toll Free Canada & U.S.A.
Phone: 1-800-664-4066
Fax:
1-877-750-0004

International
Phone: 250-382-8268
Fax:
250-382-6139

Internet
Email: LMRsales@codanradio.com
Web:
www.codanradio.com

EN140 Rev 1-1-0

Mar 13

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Author                          : plunness
Create Date                     : 2013:07:10 10:07:02-07:00
Modify Date                     : 2017:11:23 15:25:49-08:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Index.indd
Creator                         : plunness
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Metadata Date                   : 2017:11:23 15:25:49-08:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.5.5 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:0b527a3b-c784-4cc0-bf15-2581f59afa01
Instance ID                     : uuid:ff2f4679-9a32-4611-9e10-0f94fec4d4ec
Page Count                      : 166

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

00 Codan Radio LMR Technical Notes All (File) 1

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation